CX Student Software Guidebook This guidebook applies to TI-Nspire™ software version 4.5. To obtain the latest version of the documentation, go to education.ti.com/go/download.
Important Information Except as otherwise expressly stated in the License that accompanies a program, Texas Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied, including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely on an "as-is" basis.
Contents Important Information Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ CX Student Software Using the Welcome Screen Exploring the Documents Workspace Changing Language Using the Documents Workspace ii 1 1 2 3 5 Exploring the Documents Workspace Using the Documents Toolbox Exploring Document Tools Exploring the Page Sorter Exploring the TI-SmartView™ Feature Exploring Utilities Exploring Content Explorer Using the Work Area Changing Document Settings Changing Graphs & Geometry Settings 5 5 6 6 7 9 10 12 13 14
Working with PublishView™ Documents Creating a New PublishView™ Document Saving PublishView™ Documents Exploring the Documents Workspace Working with PublishView™ Objects Working with TI-Nspire™ Applications Working with Problems Organizing PublishView™ Sheets Using Zoom Adding Text to a PublishView™ Document Using Hyperlinks in PublishView™ Documents Working with Images Working with Video Files Converting Documents Printing PublishView™ Documents Working with Lesson Bundles Creating a New Lesson Bundle Ad
Submitting Responses 120 Calculator Application 121 Entering and Evaluating Math Expressions CAS: Working with Measurement Units Using the Unit Conversion Assistant Conversion Categories and Units Working with Variables Creating User-defined Functions and Programs Editing Calculator Expressions Financial Calculations Working with the Calculator History Using Variables Linking Values on Pages Creating Variables Using (Linking) Variables Naming Variables Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider Locking an
Customizing the Graphs Work Area Hiding and Showing Items in the Graphs Application Conditional Attributes Calculating a Bounded Area Tracing Graphs or Plots Introduction to Geometric Objects Creating Points and Lines Creating Geometric Shapes Creating Shapes Using Gestures (MathDraw) Basics of Working with Objects Measuring Objects Transforming Objects Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools Animating Points on Objects Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider Labeling (Identifying) the Coordinates of a
Conditional Attributes Hiding Objects in the Geometry Application Customizing the Geometry Work Area Animating Points on Objects Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider Using the Calculate Tool Lists & Spreadsheet Application Creating and Sharing Spreadsheet Data as Lists Creating Spreadsheet Data Navigating in a Spreadsheet Working with Cells Working with Rows and Columns of Data Sorting Data Generating Columns of Data Graphing Spreadsheet Data Exchanging Data with Other Computer Software Capturing Data f
Using Color in Notes Inserting Images Inserting Items on a Notes Page Inserting Comments in Notes Text Inserting Geometric Shape Symbols Entering Math Expressions in Notes Text Evaluating and Approximating Math Expressions Using Math Actions Graphing from Notes and Calculator Inserting Chemical Equations in Notes Deactivating Math Expression Boxes Changing the Attributes of Math Expression Boxes Using Calculations in Notes Exploring Notes with Examples Data Collection What You Must Know About Collection De
Saving a Widget Libraries Creating Libraries and Library Objects Private and Public Library Objects Using Library Objects Creating Shortcuts to Library Objects Included Libraries Restoring an Included Library Getting Started with the Program Editor Defining a Program or Function Viewing a Program or Function Opening a Function or Program for Editing Importing a Program from a Library Creating a Copy of a Function or Program Renaming a Program or Function Changing the Library Access Level Finding Text Find
Working with Documents Using Screen Capture Writing Lua Scripts Overview of the Script Editor Exploring the Script Editor Interface Using the Toolbar Inserting New Scripts Editing Scripts Changing View Options Setting Minimum API Level Saving Script Applications Managing Images Setting Script Permissions Debugging Scripts Using the Help Menu Activating Your Software License Registering Your Product Downloading the Latest Guidebook Exploring TI Resources Updating the TI-Nspire™ Software Updating the OS on
Getting Started with TI-Nspire™ CX Student Software TI-Nspire™ software enables students to use PC and Mac® computers to perform the same functions as on a handheld. This document covers TI-Nspire™ CX Student Software and TI-Nspire™ CX CAS Student Software. Using the Welcome Screen By default, the Welcome Screen opens the first time you start the software after installation is complete. To begin working with documents, click an icon or link, or close this screen manually.
Closing the Welcome Screen To access the default workspace and begin working with documents, click to close the Welcome Screen. To open the Welcome screen again, click Help > Welcome Screen. Exploring the Documents Workspace Note: Although not labeled, the Documents Workspace is the default workspace in the TI-Nspire™ CX Student Software. Throughout the documentation and help, the area where you work with documents is referred to as the Documents Workspace.
the active application. Ã Work area. Shows the current page of the active (selected) document. Lets you perform calculations, add applications, and add problems and pages. Only one document at a time is active. Multiple documents appear as tabs. Ä Status bar. Provides information about the active document.
2. Click ¤ to open the Choose language drop-down list. 3. Select the desired language. 4. Click Quit Now to close the software immediately. You will be prompted to save any open documents. When you restart the software, the language change is effective. —or— Click Quit Later to continue your work. The language change is not applied until you close and restart the software at a later time.
Using the Documents Workspace Use this workspace to create, modify, and view TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents, and to demonstrate mathematical concepts. Exploring the Documents Workspace À Á Â Ã Documents Toolbox. Contains tools such as the Document Tools menu, Page Sorter, TI-SmartView™ emulator, Utilities, and Content Explorer. Click each icon to access the available tools. When you are working in a TI-Nspire™ document, the tools available are specific to that document.
Exploring Document Tools In the following example, the Document Tools menu is open showing the options for the Calculator application. In TI-Nspire™ documents, the Document Tools menu contains tools available for working with an application. The tools are specific to the active application.
• Add, cut, copy, and paste pages and problems within the same document or between documents. Note: When you are working in a PublishView™ document, the Page Sorter is not available in the Documents Toolbox. À Á Â The Documents Toolbox menu. Click the minus sign to collapse the view. Click the + sign to open the view and show pages in the document. Scroll bar. The scroll bar is only active when there are too many pages to show in the pane.
Note: The following illustration shows the TI-SmartView™ panel in the teacher software. In the Student Software, only the keypad is shown. For more information, see Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator. À Á The Documents Toolbox menu. Handheld Selector. Click ¤ to select which handheld to show in the pane: • TI-Nspire™ CX or TI-Nspire™ CX CAS Then, select how to show the handheld: Â 8 • Normal • High contrast • Outline View selector.
• Handheld only • Keypad plus side screen • Handheld plus side screen Note: You can also change these options in the TI-SmartView™ Options window. Click File > Settings > TI-Smartview™ Options to open the window. Note: The view selector is not available in the student software. When the Handheld Only display is active, select Always in Front to keep the display in front of all other open applications. (Teacher software only.
Tabs for opening views where you can select and add symbols, catalog items, math operators, and library items to a document. Click the tab to open the view. Ã Exploring Content Explorer Use Content Explorer to: • See a list of files on your computer. • Create and manage lesson bundles. • If using software that supports connected handhelds, you can: - See a list of files on any connected handheld. Update the OS on connected handhelds. Transfer files between a computer and connected handhelds.
À Á The Documents Toolbox menu. Â The list of folders and files within the folder named in the Look In: field. Right-click on a highlighted file or folder to open the context menu listing available actions for that file or folder. Ã Ä Shows files on your computer and the name of the folder where the files are located. Click ¤ to navigate to another folder on the computer. Click to close the list of files. Click to open the list of files. Options menu.
• Move (navigate) up one level in the folder hierarchy. • Create a new folder. • Create a new lesson bundle. • Rename a file or folder. • Copy selected file or folder. • Paste file or folder copied to Clipboard. • Delete selected file or folder. • Select all files in a folder. • Package lesson bundles. • Refresh the view. • Install OS. Å Connected handhelds. Lists the connected handhelds.
▶ To change the page preview, click Document Preview on the toolbar, and then click Handheld or Computer. For more information on page size and document preview, see Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents. Changing Document Settings Document settings control how all numbers, including elements or matrices and lists, are displayed in TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents. You can change the default settings at anytime and you can specify settings for a specific document. Changing Document Settings 1.
Field Value • • Degree Gradian Exponential Format • • • Normal Scientific Engineering Real or Complex Format • • • Real Rectangular Polar Calculation Mode • • • Auto CAS: Exact Approximate Note: Auto mode shows an answer that is not a whole number as a fraction except when a decimal is used in the problem. Exact mode (CAS) shows an answer that is not a whole number as a fraction or in symbolic form, except when a decimal is used in the problem.
Complete the following steps to customize the application settings for graphs and geometry. 1. Create a new graphs and geometry document or open an existing document. 2. In the Documents Toolbox, click to open the Graphs & Geometry application menu. 3. Click Settings > Settings . The Graphs & Geometry Settings dialog box opens. 4. Press Tab or use your mouse to move through the list of settings. Click ¢ to open the drop-down list to view the available values for each setting.
5. Select the desired setting. 6. Select a check box to enable an option or clear a check box to disable an option. Check box Operation when selected Automatically hide plot labels Plot labels are displayed only when selected, grabbed, or hovered.
Working with Connected Handhelds The TI-Nspire™ software enables you to view content, manage files, and install operating system updates on handhelds connected to the computer.
Option How it Works Note: If you don’t select a new location, the copied file is pasted with a new name "Copy of ..." Delete Delete a file on a connected handheld: • Click the file you want to delete. • Click Delete. • Click Yes when the Warning dialog box opens. Click No to cancel. Refresh To refresh the list of files, click Options > Refresh. Rename To rename a file on a connected handheld: • Click the file you want to rename. • Click Options > Rename. • Type the new name and press Enter.
1. Ensure the handheld is connected to your computer. 2. Click to open Content Explorer. The folders and files on your computer are listed in the Computer pane. 3. Navigate to the folder or file you want to save to the handheld. 4. Click the file to select it. 5. Drag the file to a connected handheld listed in the Connected Handheld pane. The file is saved to the connected handheld.
3. Click Close to close the dialog box, or click Continue and follow the prompts to install the OS on the handheld. Installing an OS Update Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, close all documents on the handheld before updating its operating system (OS). Updating the OS does not replace or remove previously saved documents. The OS on a new handheld comes bundled with the installer, which places the OS in a default location such as: C:\mydocuments\TI-Nspire\downloads. Go to education.ti.
3. Hover your mouse over the TI-Nspire™ handheld you want to update, and then right-click. 4. Click Check for OS Update. The Check for OS Update dialog box opens. 5. Click Close to cancel the installation, or click Continue and follow the prompts to install the OS on the handheld. When the update is complete, the handheld restarts automatically. Updating the OS on Multiple Handhelds Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, close all documents on the handheld before updating its operating system (OS).
4. Click Add OS file. The Add to Transfer List dialog box opens. 5. Select the applicable OS files. 22 • To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ CX handheld, select TI-Nspire.tco. • To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ CX CAS handheld, select TI-Nspire.tcc. • To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ handheld, select TI-Nspire.tno.
• To upgrade a TI-Nspire™ CAS handheld, select TI-Nspire.tnc. 6. Click Select. The OS Installation redisplays with your selected OS files. 7. Click Install OS. The OS version information updates, and the Select OS Handheld File dialog redisplays for further selection.
24
Working with TI-Nspire™ Documents All work that you create and save using TI-Nspire™ applications is stored as a document, which you can share with others using TI-Nspire™ software and with those using handhelds. There are two types of documents: • TI-Nspire™ document (.tns file) • PublishView™ document (.tnsp file) TI-Nspire™ Documents A TI-Nspire™ document consists of one or more problems. Each problem can contain one or more pages. A single page is displayed in the work area.
The new document opens in the Documents Workspace, and you are prompted to select an application. 2. Select an application to add a problem to the document. The problem is added to the document. Opening an Existing Document To open an existing document: 1. Click File > Open Document. —or— Click . The Open dialog box opens.
2. Use the file browser to locate the file you want to open and click the file to select it. 3. Click Open. The document opens in the work area. Note: To select from your 10 most recent documents, click File > Recent Documents and select a document from the drop-down list. Saving TI-Nspire™ Documents To save a new document: 1. Click File > Save Document or click . The Save TI-Nspire™ Document dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the document or create a folder in which to store the document. 3. Type a name for the new document. 4. Click Save to save the document. The document closes and is saved with the extension .tns. Note: When you save a file, the software looks in the same folder the next time you open a file. Saving a Document with a New Name To save a previously saved document in a new folder and/or with a new name: 1. Click File > Save As.
Formatting Text in Documents Use the text formatting tools to format text in TI-Nspire™ applications that allow formatted text, and to format text in PublishView™ documents. By default, the text formatting toolbar opens in the area above an active document. Options on the toolbar are enabled or disabled depending on the active application. Option Function Click ¤ to open the menu for the active application.
Option Function For more information, see Working with PublishView™ Documents. Hiding and Showing the Formatting Toolbar ▶ When the formatting toolbar is visible, click £ (located under the toolbar) to hide the toolbar. ▶ Click ¤ to show the toolbar when the formatting toolbar is hidden.
• Handheld. Size: 320 × 217 pixels, fixed. Handheld documents can be viewed on all platforms. You can magnify (zoom) the content when viewing it on a tablet or larger screen. • Computer. Size: 640 × 434 pixels, minimum. Computer documents scale up automatically to take advantage of higher resolution screens. The minimum size is 640 × 434, so some content may be clipped on handheld devices. Note: You can view documents of either page size using Handheld or Computer preview.
The new size applies to documents that you create (Windows®: Ctrl+C, Mac®: Cmd+C) after setting the default, including the blank document created automatically each time you open the software. Changing the default setting does not convert any currently open documents or other existing documents. Setting a Default Preview By default, when you open a document, it is automatically displayed using the preview that matches its page size. You can override this rule and specify a preview that you prefer. 1.
The status bar remains available; however, document names now appear in the thumbnail view. Click Select Window > Show Documents in Tabs to view one document at a time in the work area. Working with Applications When you first open a new document or add a new problem to a document, you select an application from a menu. The following illustration shows how a document containing the Lists & Spreadsheet application appears in the work area.
À Document name. Tabs show the names of open documents. Click a name to make it the active document. Á Page Size. Shows the document's page size as Handheld or Computer. You can use the TI-Nspire™ File menu to convert a document from one page size to the other. Â Problem/Page counter. Labels the problem number and page number of the active page. For example, a label of 1.2 identifies Problem 1, Page 2. Ã Settings.
Working with Multiple Applications on a Page You can add up to four applications to a page. When you have multiple applications on a page, the menu for the active application is displayed in the Documents Toolbox. Using multiple applications involves two steps: • Changing the page layout to accommodate multiple applications. • Adding the applications. You can add multiple applications to a page even if an application is already active.
3. In Handheld preview, click Press menu to select an application for each new section in the problem or page. In Computer view, select Click here to add an application. Swapping Applications To change the position of applications on a page with multiple applications, “swap“ the positions of two applications. 1. Click Edit > Page Layout > Swap Application. Note: The last active application you worked on is automatically selected as the first application to be swapped. 2.
À Page Sorter. Lists the problems you have inserted in your document and shows thumbnail images of the pages in each problem. The Page Sorter lets you rearrange, copy, and move both problems and pages. It also lets you rename problems. Á Active page. Indicates the current page by highlighting its thumbnail image. Thumbnails let you easily scan the pages in a document and select a specific page to work with. Â Problem/Page counter.
1. If necessary, click the Page Sorter tool in the Documents Toolbox. 2. In the Page Sorter, drag the thumbnail image of the page to the desired position. Copying a Page You can copy a page within the same problem or copy it to a different problem or document. 1. If necessary, click the Page Sorter tool in the Documents Toolbox. 2. Select the thumbnail of the page to be copied. 3. On the Edit menu, click Copy. 4. Click the location at which you want to insert the copy. 5. On the Edit menu, click Paste.
Ungrouping Applications into Separate Pages 1. Select the grouped page. 2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Ungroup. The applications are divided into individual pages. Deleting an Application from a Page 1. Click the application to be deleted. 2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Delete Application. Tip: To undo the delete, press Ctrl + Z (Mac®: “+ Z). Working with Problems and Pages When you create a new document, it consists of a single problem with a single page.
Renaming a Problem New problems are named automatically as Problem 1, Problem 2, and so on. To rename a problem: 1. If necessary, click the Page Sorter tool in the Documents Toolbox. 2. Click the problem name to select it. 3. On the Edit menu, click Rename. 4. Type the new name. Rearranging Problems with the Page Sorter The Page Sorter lets you reorder problems within a document. If you move a problem that you have not renamed, the numeric part of the default name changes to reflect the new position. 1.
3. On the Edit menu, click Cut. 4. Click the new location of the problem. 5. On the Edit menu, click Paste. Deleting a Problem To delete a problem and its pages from the document: 1. If necessary, click the Page Sorter tool in the Documents Toolbox. 2. Click the problem name to select it. 3. On the Edit menu, click Delete. Printing Documents 1. Click File > Print. The Print dialog box opens. 2. Set options for the print job.
Note: To restore the Print defaults, click Reset. Using Print Preview • Click the Preview check box to toggle the preview pane. • Click the arrows at the bottom of the preview pane to page through the preview. Viewing Document Properties and Copyright Information Note: Most of these instructions apply only to the Teacher Software. Checking Page Size 1. In the Teacher Software, go to the TI-Nspire™ File menu and select Document Properties . 2. Click the Page Size tab. 3.
Adding Copyright Information to a Document Using the Teacher Software, you can add copyright information to individual documents that you create, or you can apply the same copyright information to all new documents. 1. Open the document. 2. On the TI-Nspire™ File menu, select Document Properties . 3. Click the Copyright tab. 4. Edit the following fields to define the copyright details: • Author • Copyright (select Public Domain or Copyright).
44
Working with PublishView™ Documents Use the PublishView™ feature to create and share interactive documents with teachers and students. You can create documents that include formatted text, TI-Nspire™ applications, images, hyperlinks, links to videos, and embedded videos in a format that is suitable for printing on a standard piece of paper, publishing to a website or blog, or for use as an interactive worksheet.
• • By default, the document contains the page number in a # of # format at the bottom of the sheet. The scroll bars on the right side of the screen and at the bottom of the screen are active. 2. Add TI-Nspire™ applications and PublishView™ objects as needed to complete the document. About PublishView™ Documents When working with PublishView™ documents, it is important to keep the following points in mind: • PublishView™ documents are saved as .
• When you convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document (.tns file), TI-Nspire™ applications are converted. PublishView™ objects containing text, hyperlinks, videos, and images are not converted. • You cannot create or open a PublishView™ document on a handheld. You must convert a PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document before sending it to a handheld.
header area is active, you can type and format text as needed. Á Problem break and name. In PublishView™ documents, use problem breaks to control the page layout. You can select to hide or show problem breaks. Deleting a problem removes the contents of the problem and removes the space between problems when there are multiple problems. Problem breaks also enable you to use variables in PublishView™ documents.
À Document names are displayed in tabs. If multiple documents are open, the document names are listed. You can have TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents open at the same time. In this example, Document 1 is an inactive TI-Nspire™ document ( ). Document 2 is the active PublishView™ document ( ). Click the X to close a document. Á Page Size. Shows the document's page size as Handheld or Computer. You can use the TI-Nspire™ File menu to convert a document from one page size to the other.
—or— Click . The Save TI-Nspire™ Document dialog box opens. 2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the document. —or— Create a folder in which to store the document. 3. Type a name for the new document. 4. Click Save. The document closes and is saved with the extension .tnsp. Note: When you save a file, the software first looks in the same folder the next time you open a file. Saving a Document with a New Name To save a previously saved document in a new folder and/or with a new name: 1.
Create a folder in which to store the document. 3. Type a new name for the document. 4. Click Save to save the document with a new name. Note: You can also use the Save As option to convert documents from TI-Nspire™ files to PublishView™ files or convert PublishView™ files to TI-Nspire™ files. Exploring the Documents Workspace When you create or open a PublishView™ document, it opens in the Documents Workspace.
À In a PublishView™ document: • Click to open the application menu and tools needed to work with TI-Nspire™ applications and PublishView™ objects. • Click to open the Utilities panel where you can access Math Templates, Symbols, the Catalog, Math Operators, and Libraries. • Click to open Content Explorer. Note: For more information, see Using the Documents Workspace. Á Â 52 Click to collapse a pane containing a menu. Click to expand a pane. TI-Nspire™ applications.
Calculator Graph Geometry Lists & Spreadsheet Data & Statistics Notes Vernier DataQuest™ Question (Available in TI-Nspire™ CX Teacher Software, TI-Nspire™ CX Navigator™ Teacher Software, and TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC Teacher Software). Ã TI-Nspire™ Documents. Use this tool to locate and insert existing TI-Nspire™ documents (.tns files) into a problem. Ä PublishView™ Objects.
• Right-click on an object to open a context menu, which displays the actions that can be performed on that object. • Use add, insert, and paste to add objects to a PublishView™ document. • Use delete and cut to remove objects from a PublishView™ document. • Move objects from one place to another within a PublishView™ document. • Copy objects from one document and paste them into another PublishView™ document. • Resize and scale objects such as text boxes and images.
Working with PublishView™ Objects In a PublishView™ document, text, hyperlinks, images, and videos are contained in PublishView™ objects. You can move, resize, copy and paste, and delete an object within a PublishView™ document. Objects can also be positioned so that one overlaps the other. Within a document, PublishView™ objects can exist in three states: unselected, selected, and interactive. State Description Unselected When unselected, an object does not have handles for repositioning and sizing.
State Description Interactive An interactive state is indicated by a blue frame around the object. To enter interactive state, left-click or right-click anywhere in the body of the object. When in an interactive state, you can work with the contents of the object. For example, you can add or edit text in a text box or complete math functions in a TI-Nspire™ application. When in an interactive state, context menus contain options specific to the contents of an object. Inserting an Object 1.
Selected text boxes and frames can be resized, moved, copied, pasted, and deleted. 4. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the object and drag it to position the object in the document as needed. Opening Object Context Menus ▶ Right-click the border of any object in a PublishView™ document. The context menu opens to provide access to delete, copy/paste, cut, and bring to front/send to back actions.
Resizing an Object 1. Click any border around the object to select it. The border becomes a bold blue line and the handles are active. 2. Move your mouse over one of the handles to activate the resizing tool. 3. Grab one of the handles and drag in the direction needed to make the object larger or smaller. 4. Click outside the object to save the new size. Moving an Object To move an object to another location on the page: 1. Click any border around the object to select it.
À vertical alignment guide Á horizontal alignment guide 4. Drag the object to a new location on the page. 5. Release the mouse button to drop the object in its new location. Overlapping Objects You can position objects so that one is on top of another. You can control the stacking order to specify which object is positioned in front or behind the other. Overlapping objects have many practical uses when presenting information in the classroom.
To change the position of an object in the stacking order: 1. Click the border of the object you want to position to select it, and then right-click to open the context menu. 2. Click Send to back or Bring to front to move the selected object to the desired position.
1. Click any border of the object to select it. When an object is selected, the border is blue and the handles are active. 2. Press the Delete key to delete the text box. —or— Right-click a border, and then click Delete from the context menu. Choosing a Working Folder for PublishView™ Objects Use the Choose Your Working Folder field in the PublishView™ Objects pane to select a folder for storing PublishView™ documents and related files. 1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open. 2. Click .
3. Navigate to the folder where you want to store video and image files. 4. Click Open to choose the working folder. The selected folder becomes the working folder and the folder name is displayed in the Choose your working folder field. Previews of supported images and video files in the folder are shown in the PublishView™ objects pane. 5. To add an image or video file to a PublishView™ document, select the file and move it onto the active sheet.
• From the TI-Nspire™ Applications pane in the Documents Toolbox, use the mouse pointer to point to the application and drag it to the problem. • From the menu bar, click Insert and choose an application from the drop-down menu. • Right-click inside the sheet to open the context menu, click Insert and choose an application from the menu. The application is added to the sheet. 2. Using your mouse, grab the handles to resize or position the application object as needed. 3.
5. To work in the application, click an option from the application menu. Click collapse the application menu pane. to Adding Existing TI-Nspire™ Documents Use the TI-Nspire™ Documents pane to open an existing TI-Nspire™ document to add to a PublishView™ document. When you open an existing TI-Nspire™ document, all pages of the document appear in the preview pane. You can move complete problems or individual pages onto the PublishView™ sheet.
2. Click . The Choose Your Working Document dialog box opens. 3. Navigate to the folder in which the TI-Nspire™ document is stored: • Click ¤ in the Look in: field to use a file browser to locate a folder. • From an open folder, click • Click to return to the default home folder • Click to add a new folder to open folder on your computer. • Click to list folders and files. To show details, click to move up a level in the folder hierarchy . 4. Select the file, and then click Open.
5. To add the TI-Nspire™ document to the PublishView™ document, move one page at a time or one problem at a time to the PublishView™ sheet. If you are adding a problem with multiple pages, the pages are stacked on top of each other on the PublishView™ sheet. Move the top page to see the other pages. Working with Problems Like a TI-Nspire™ document, a PublishView™ document consists of one or more problems. Problems are used to control the layout of a PublishView™ document so that you can isolate variables.
• Problem breaks are not relative to any object, which lets you move objects within a problem without affecting the problem break location. Adding a Problem To add a problem to an open PublishView™ document: 1. Right-click anywhere on the sheet, and then click Insert > Problem. The problem is added to the document below any existing problems. The problem break provides a visible divider between problems. 2.
The Show/Hide Options dialog box opens. Note: You can also click View > PublishView™ Layout Options . 3. Clear the Show problem breaks option to hide problem breaks in the document. Select the option to return to the default setting and show the problem breaks. 4. Click OK to close the dialog box. Renaming a Problem 1. Click the existing problem name on the problem break line. 2. Type a new name for the problem. 3. Click outside the text box to save the new name.
Adding Sheets to a Document To add a sheet to a document: ▶ Click Insert > Sheet. The sheet is added to the document and the numbering increments by one. Opening the Sheet Context Menu ▶ Right-click in any blank area (outside of any object) in a PublishView™ sheet. A context menu opens with options for inserting problems, pages, applications, and PublishView™ objects, edit options for removing space or deleting a page, and options for hiding and showing problem breaks and object borders.
The text box borders in the margin become visible and the object space is disabled. The cursor is placed in the header or footer space and the formatting toolbar becomes active. 2. Type the text. • The default font is TI-Nspire™ true type, 12 pt, normal. • By default, text is centered horizontally and vertically. • Text can be aligned: left, center, right, or justified. • Text that does not fit within the text box horizontally will wrap to the next line.
3. Clear the Show object borders option to hide the borders around the objects in the problem. Select the option to return to the default setting and show borders. 4. Click OK to close the dialog box. Adding and Removing Space To manage how PublishView™ objects appear on a sheet, you may need to add or delete space between objects. Note: You can add and remove vertical space between objects using this method. To add or remove horizontal space between objects, move the object. Adding Space 1.
Add/Remove Space tool 3. Use your mouse to position the tool to the exact place where you want to add space. 4. Click the tool, and then drag down to select the amount of space you want to add. As you select the amount of space to be added, it is indicated in green.
5. Press the Enter key to add the space in between the objects. You can adjust the amount of space by dragging up and down before you press Enter. Removing Space 1. Right-click in the area outside of any object where you want to remove space. The context menu opens. 2. Click Edit > Add/Remove Space. The Add/Remove Space tool becomes active.
Add/Remove Space tool 3. Use your mouse to position the tool to the exact place where you want to remove space. 4. Click the tool, and then drag up to select the amount of space you want to remove. As you select the amount of space to be removed, it is indicated in red. 5. Press the Enter key to remove the space in between the objects. You can adjust the amount of space by dragging up and down before you press Enter.
Note: If there is not enough space on the sheet to accommodate the objects, the objects won’t be moved when space is removed. Deleting Blank Sheets from Problems You can delete a sheet that does not contain any TI-Nspire™ applications or PublishView™ objects from a problem. To delete a blank sheet from a problem: 1. Delete any TI-Nspire™ applications, PublishView™ objects, move or delete any problem breaks from the sheet. 2. Place your cursor inside the sheet you want to delete. 3.
Notes application. You should also use Notes when you are planning to convert the PublishView™ document to a TI-Nspire™ document for use on a handheld and you want handheld users to see the text. • Add text in TI-Nspire™ applications that allow text just as you would in a TI-Nspire™ document. Inserting Text into a Text Box 1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open. 2. Use your mouse to click and drag it to the problem. 3. Release the mouse button to drop the text box into the problem. 4.
7. Type the new text. —or— Copy and paste text from another file. 8. Apply formatting as needed. 9. Click outside the text box to save the text. Formatting and Editing Text The options for editing and formatting text are located on a formatting toolbar at the top of the active document. Formatting options for editing text include: • Changing the font, font size, and font color. • Applying bold, italics, and underline formatting.
• Link to a file • Link to a website on the Internet You can add a hyperlink to an open document or you can convert any text within a text box to a hyperlink. When a hyperlink is added, the formatting of the text is underlined and the font color is blue. You can change the formatting of the hyperlinked text without losing the hyperlink.
2. Drag the hyperlink icon onto the document. The Hyperlink dialog box opens. 3. Type the name of the link in the Text field. For example, this can be the name of the document. 4. Copy the location of the file path you want to link to, and paste it in the Address field. —or— Type the location of the file in the Address field. Note: Type ../ to designate parent directories. For example: ../../lessons/mathlesson2.tns 5. Click OK to insert the link.
Linking to a File by Browsing 1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects pane is open. 2. Drag the hyperlink icon onto the document. The Hyperlink dialog box opens. 3. Type the name of the link in the Text field. For example, this can be the name of the document. 4. Click to select Link to a file on your computer or network drive. The Select file to insert as hyperlink dialog box opens.
5. Navigate to and select the file you want to link to, and then click Insert. The path name is inserted into the Address field in the Hyperlink dialog box. If the software is unable to determine if the link is a relative or absolute address, the Hyperlink dialog box opens with an option to change the type of link. To change the link, click the appropriate option: • Change to absolute address . • Change to relative address . 6. Click OK to insert the link.
7. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the text box. —or— Grab any border to position the text box in the document as needed. Linking to a Website There are two ways to link to a website; by typing or pasting the URL into the Address field, or by browsing to a file. Linking to a Website by Using an Address 1. Ensure the PublishView™ Objects menu is open. 2. Drag the hyperlink icon box. onto the document to open the Hyperlink dialog 3.
2. Drag the hyperlink icon box. 3. Click onto the document to open the Hyperlink dialog to select Link to an Internet resource. The browser opens to your default website. 4. Navigate to the website or file on a website that you want to link to. 5. Copy the URL, and then paste it in the Address field in the Hyperlink dialog box. —or— Type the URL in the Address field. 6. Click OK. A text box containing the hyperlink is added to the PublishView™ document. 7.
Editing a Hyperlink To change the name of a hyperlink, change the path, or change the URL, complete the following steps. 1. Using your mouse, right-click the hyperlink text, and then click Edit hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens. 2. Make corrections as needed: • Type corrections to the hyperlink name in the Text field. • Click to open the Select a file to add as a hyperlink dialog box and use the file browser to navigate to the folder where the file is located.
Click to create a link to page on a website. Removing a Hyperlink Use this process to remove a link from text inside a text box. The text remains in the document. 1. Using your mouse, right-click the hyperlink text. 2. Click Remove hyperlink. The hyperlink formatting is removed from the text and the text is no longer clickable. Note: To remove both the text and hyperlink, delete the text. If a text box contains only the linked text, delete the text box.
2. Click , and then drag the icon to the document. The Choose an image to insert into PublishView™ dialog box opens. Note: By default, the Texas Instruments preloaded images folder is displayed. 3. Navigate to the folder where the image file you want to insert is located, and then highlight the file name. 4. Click Insert image. The image is added to the PublishView™ sheet. 5.
Grab any border to position the text box in the document as needed. Moving Images 1. Click the frame containing the image to select it. 2. Move your cursor over the edge of the image to activate the positioning tool. 3. Move the image to its new location on the PublishView™ sheet. Note: Objects can overlap each other on a PublishView™ sheet. Resizing Images 1. Click the frame containing the image to select it. 2. Move your cursor over one of the blue handles to activate the resizing tool. 3.
3. Navigate to the folder where the video file you want to insert is located, and select the file name. 4. Click Insert video. An object containing the embedded video is added to the PublishView™ sheet. By default, the resizing and positioning handles are active. 5. Using the mouse, grab the handles to resize the object or grab any border to position the object in the document as needed.
À Starts or stops the video. Á Shows the elapsed time as the video plays. Â Mutes or unmutes the audio. Converting Documents You can convert PublishView™ documents (.tnsp files) to TI-Nspire™ documents (.tns files) for display on handhelds. You can also convert TI-Nspire™ documents to PublishView™ documents. Converting a document creates a new document—the original document remains intact and is not linked to the new document.
• All supported TI-Nspire™ applications are part of the new TI-Nspire™ document. • Starting from top to bottom, and then left to right, the layout of the TI-Nspire™ document is based on the order of the TI-Nspire™ applications in the PublishView™ document. - Every TI-Nspire™ application in a PublishView™ document will appear as a page in the converted TI-Nspire™ document. The order of the pages in the TI-Nspire™ document is based on the layout of the TI-Nspire™ applications in the PublishView™ document.
• By default, there are six objects per page. • When converted, each problem from the TI-Nspire™ document will start a new sheet in the PublishView™ document. • Problem breaks are maintained. 3. When work in the document is complete, click to save the document in the current folder. —or— Click File > Save As to save the document in a different folder. Note: You can also use the Save as option to save a TI-Nspire™ document as a PublishView™ document.
92
Working with Lesson Bundles Many lessons or activities contain multiple files. For example, teachers usually have a teacher version of a file, a student version, assessments, and sometimes supporting files. A lesson bundle is a container that enables teachers to group all files needed for a lesson together. Lesson bundles are used to: • Add any type of file (.tns, .tnsp, .doc, .pdf, .ppt) to a lesson bundle. • Send lesson bundles to connected handhelds or laptops; however, only the .
• If all needed files are located in the same folder, create a lesson bundle with selected files. Creating an Empty Lesson Bundle Complete the following steps to create a lesson bundle that does not contain files. 1. Navigate to the folder on your computer where you want to save the lesson bundle. Note: If you are using the software for the first time, you may need to create a folder on your computer before creating a lesson bundle. 2. Click or click File > New Lesson Bundle.
• Drag any file into a selected lesson bundle. This method moves the file to the lesson bundle. If you delete the lesson bundle, the file is deleted from your computer. You can recover the file from the Recycle Bin. • Copy and paste any file into a selected lesson bundle. • Use the "Add files to lesson bundle" option. This method copies the selected files into the lesson bundle. The file is not moved from its original location.
3. Navigate to and select the file you want to add to the lesson bundle. • • • You can select multiple files at one time if they are located in the same folder. If files are located in different folders, you can add them one at a time. You cannot create a folder within a lesson bundle or add a folder to a lesson bundle. 4. Click Add to add the file to the bundle. The file is added to the bundle and is now listed in the lesson bundle dialog box. 5.
Note: You cannot open a lesson bundle outside of the TI-Nspire™ software. For example, if you open the folder using the file manager on your computer and doubleclick the lesson bundle name, it does not automatically launch the TI-Nspire™ software. Opening Files Within a Lesson Bundle You can open any file within a lesson bundle on your computer if you have the program associated with the file type. • When you open a .tns or .tnsp file, the file opens in the Documents Workspace in the TI-Nspire™ software.
2. Double-click the lesson bundle name to open the Lesson Bundle dialog box. 3. Select the file you want to work with and click ¢ to open the context menu. 4. Click the action you want to perform: • • 98 Click Open. TI-Nspire™ and PublishView™ documents open in the Documents Workspace. When you open another file type, it launches the application or program associated with that file. Click Copy to place the file in the Clipboard.
• • • • • • • Navigate to a folder on your computer or select a connected handheld or laptop, and then right-click and click Paste to place the copied file in a new location. Click Delete to delete a file from the lesson bundle. Use caution when deleting a file from a lesson bundle. You should ensure files contained in the bundle are backed up if you need the files for future use. Click Rename to give the file a new name. To cancel this action, press Esc.
2. Click the action you want to perform. If an action is not available, it is dimmed. • Click Open to open the lesson bundle. • Click Up One Level to navigate up a level in the folder hierarchy. • You cannot add a folder to a lesson bundle. If you click New Folder, a new folder is added to the folder where the lesson bundle is stored. • Click New Lesson Bundle to create a new lesson bundle.
• Click Package Lesson to create a .tilb file. • Click Refresh to update the list of files in the open folder. Managing Lesson Bundles in the Content Workspace 1. Click Computer Content in the Resources pane. 2. In the Content pane, navigate to the lesson bundle you want to work with, and then right-click to open the context menu or click to open the menu of options. 3. Select the action you want to perform: • Click Open to open the lesson bundle.
• To add more files to the lesson bundle, click Lesson Bundles > Add Files to Lesson Bundle. • Click Lesson Bundles >Package Lesson Bundle to create a .tilb file. • Click Send to Connected Handhelds to open the Transfer Tool and send the lesson bundle to connected handhelds. (This option is not available in the TI-Nspire™ Navigator™ NC Teacher Software.) Packaging Lesson Bundles Packaging lesson bundles creates a "package" folder with a .tilb file.
• From the Content pane, right-click the lesson bundle name, and then click Lesson Bundles > Package Lesson Bundle. The Lesson Bundle dialog box opens confirming that the lesson bundle was created. 4. Click Yes to open the folder where the lesson package is stored. Click No to close the dialog box. Emailing a Lesson Bundle After a lesson bundle is packaged, you can email the .tilb file to other teachers or students. To attach the lesson bundle to an email: 1.
104
Capturing Screens Screen Capture enables you to: • Capture Page • Capture Selected Handheld • Capture the active page in a TI-Nspire™ document from the software or from the TI-SmartView™ emulator as an image. Save captured images as .jpg, .gif, .png, or .tif files, which can be inserted into TI-Nspire™ applications that allow images. Copy and paste images into another application such as Microsoft® Word. Capture the current screen on a connected handheld as an image. Save captured images as .jpg, .
The image of the active page is copied to the Clipboard and to the Screen Capture window. The dialog box opens in the lower right corner of your desktop when the screen capture is complete. 3. Click View it. The Screen Capture window opens. You can also click Window > Screen Capture Window to open the Screen Capture window. 4. To capture additional pages, move to another page in the current document or open a new document to select a page.
• • • In the Content Workspace, select the handheld from the list of Connected Handhelds in the Resources pane. In the Documents Workspace, open Content Explorer from the Documents Toolbox, and then select the handheld from the list of Connected Handhelds. In the Class Workspace, select a logged in student. 3. Click , and then click Capture Selected Handheld. —or— Click , and then click Capture Selected Handheld. The screen is copied to the Clipboard and to the TI-Nspire™ Screen Capture window.
Zooming the View of Captured Screens In the Screen Capture window, use the zoom in and zoom out options to increase or decrease the size of the captured screens. ▶ From the toolbar, click to increase the size of the screens in the view. You can also click View > Zoom In from the menu. ▶ From the toolbar, click to decrease the size of the screens in the view. You can also click View > Zoom Out from the menu.
3. Navigate to the folder on your computer where you want to save the file. 4. Type a name for the file. Note: The default file name is MM-DD-YYYY Image ###. 5. Select the file type for the image file. The default format is .jpg. Click ¤ to select another format: .gif, .tif, or .png. 6. Click Save. The file is saved in the designated folder. Saving Multiple Screens 1. In the Screen Capture window, select the screens you want to save.
5. Select the file type for the image files. The default format is .jpg. Click ¤ to select another format: .gif, .tif, or .png. 6. Click Save. The images are saved in the specified folder with system-assigned names reflecting the current date and a sequence number. For example, MM-DD-YYYY Image 001.jpg, MM-DD-YYYY Image 002.jpg and so on. Copying and Pasting a Screen You can select a captured screen and copy it to the Clipboard for inclusion into other documents or applications.
2. To start the screen capture, click the area above the emulator screen or above the keypad. In the Handheld + Sidescreen display, you can also click the area around the emulator screen. Do not release the mouse button. If the cursor is active or if you click inside the emulator window, the screen capture is not started. In Handheld + SideScreen view, click the area above the emulator, click the area around the emulator, or click the border of the emulator screen to start the screen capture.
4. Drag the image to an open third-party application. When the image is on top of the third-party application, the indicates you can drop the image. 5. Release the mouse button to drop the image into the selected application. The image is also copied to the Clipboard and to the TI-Nspire™ Screen Capture window. To view captured images in the Screen Capture window, click Window > Screen Capture Window. You can capture additional screens as needed.
Working with Images Images can be used in TI-Nspire™ applications for reference, assessment, and instructional purposes. You can add images to the following TI-Nspire™ applications: • Graphs & Geometry • Data & Statistics • Notes • Question, including Quick Poll In the Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, images are set in the background behind the axis and other objects.
3. Navigate to the folder where the image is located and select the image. 4. Click Open. • In the Graphs & Geometry and Data & Statistics applications, the image is inserted in the background behind the axis. • In Notes, Question, and Quick Poll, the image is inserted at the cursor location. You can type text above or below the image, and you can move the image up or down on the page. Note: You can also insert images by copying an image to the Clipboard and pasting it into the application.
• If an image is in the foreground, the cursor changes to . • If an image is in the background, the cursor changes to . 3. Drag the image to the new location and release the mouse button to place the image. If an image is in the foreground, the cursor changes to when you hover your mouse pointer over a location where there is a new line or space. Images in the background can be moved and placed anywhere on the page.
2. Press Delete. The image is removed.
Responding to Questions The teacher may send you several different question types. This section shows you how to answer the different question types. Understanding the Question Toolbar When you open a document with a question, a toolbar is available with four options. Access the toolbar using the following method. ▶ In the Documents Toolbox, click . Handheld: press b . Tool name Tool function Clear Answers Lets you clear the answers in the current question or in the document.
• Open response - • Equations and Expressions - • (x,y) numerical input Drop Point(s) List(s) Image - • y= f(x)= Expression Coordinate Points and Lists - • Explanation (not auto-graded) Text Match (auto-graded) Label Point on Chemistry Responding to Quick Poll Questions When teachers send quick polls during class, the question opens as a new document on top of any document you may currently have open.
3. When you are finished, click the Quick Poll icon. When you respond to a poll, your response is immediately sent to the teacher’s computer and teachers can track student responses in real time. Showing Your Work The teacher may request you to show work for your response. If so, the response area has sections for you to write your starting point, your steps, and the final answer. Responding to Different Question Types ▶ For Multiple Choice questions, press Tab to navigate to a response.
▶ For Chemistry questions, type a response. ▶ For Image: Label questions, press Tab to move the cursor to a label on the image. Type a response in the label field. ▶ For Image: Point on questions, press Tab to move the cursor to a point on the image. Press Enter to mark a response. Checking Answers If the teacher enables self-check on the question, the Check Answer option is available. 1. Click . Handheld: Press b . 2. Click Check Answer.
Calculator Application The Calculator application lets you: • Enter and evaluate math expressions • Define variables, functions, and programs that become available to any TI-Nspire™ application—such as the Graphs application—residing in the same problem. • Define library objects, such as variables, functions, and programs, which are accessible from any problem of any document. For information on creating library objects, see Libraries.
Entering and Evaluating Math Expressions Entering Simple Math Expressions Note: To enter a negative number on the handheld, press v. To enter a negative number on a computer keyboard, press the hyphen key ( -). Suppose you want to evaluate 1. Select the entry line in the Calculator work area. 2. Type 2^8 to begin the expression. 3. Press ► to return the cursor to the baseline. 4. Complete the expression: Type *43/12. Handheld: Type r 43 p 12. 5. Press Enter to evaluate the expression.
You can force a decimal approximation in a result: • By pressing shortcut keys. Windows®: Press Ctrl +Enter to evaluate the expression. Mac®: Press “+Enter to evaluate the expression. Handheld: Press / · instead of · to evaluate the expression. Pressing / · forces the approximate result. • By including a decimal in the expression (for example, 43. instead of 43). • By wrapping the expression in the approx() function. • By changing the document’s Auto or Approximate mode setting to Approximate.
Note: Some functions have a wizard that prompts you for each argument. Those functions are shown with an indicator. To receive the prompts, select Wizards On. 2. If the item you are inserting is visible in the list, select it and press Enter to insert it. 3. If the item is not visible: a) Click inside the list of functions, and then press a letter key to jump to the entries that begin with that letter. b) Press ▲ or ▼ as necessary to highlight the item you are inserting.
Using an Expression Template The Calculator has templates for entering matrices, piecewise functions, systems of equations, integrals, derivatives, products, and other math expressions. For example, suppose you want to evaluate 1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates. Handheld: Press t. 2. Click to insert the algebraic sum template. The template appears on the entry line with small blocks representing elements that you can enter.
Creating Matrices 1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates. Handheld: Press t. 2. Click . The Create a Matrix dialog box opens. 3. Type the Number of rows . 4. Type the Number of columns , and then click OK. Calculator opens a template with spaces for the rows and columns. Note: If you create a matrix with a large number of rows and columns, it may take a few moments to appear. 5. Type the matrix values into the template, and then press Enter to define the matrix.
For example, suppose you want to fit a y = mx + b linear regression model to the following two lists: {1,2,3,4,5} {5,8,11,14,17} 1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the Catalog. Handheld: Press k 1. 2. Click an entry in the Catalog, and then press L to jump to the entries that begin with “L.” 3. Press ▼ as necessary to highlight LinRegMx. 4.
Calculator inserts the expression and adds statements to copy the regression equation and show the variable stat.results, which will contain the results. LinRegMx {1,2,3,4,5},{5,8,11,14,17},1: CopyVar stat.RegEqn,f2: stat.results Calculator then shows the stat.results variables. Note: You can copy values from the stat.results variables and paste them into the entry line. Creating a Piecewise Function 1. Begin the function definition. For example, type the following expression: Define f(x,y)= 2.
6. Enter an expression to evaluate or graph the function. For example, type the expression f(1,2) on the Calculator entry line. Creating a System of Equations 1. On the Utilities tab, click to open the templates. Handheld: Press t. 2. Click . The Create a System of Equations dialog box opens. 3. Type the Number of Equations , and click OK. Calculator opens a template with spaces for the equations. 4. Type the equations into the template, and press Enter to define the system of equations.
CAS: Converting Between Measurement Units You can convert a value between any two units within the same category (such as length). Example: Using the Catalog, convert 12 meters to feet. The desired expression is 12•_ m ►_ft. 1. Type 12 on the entry line. 2. On the Utilities tab, click to show the unit conversions. Handheld: Press k 3. 3. Click the Length category to expand the list of pre-defined length units. Handheld: Scroll to the Length category, and press Enter. 4. Scroll to meter.
5. Press Enter to paste _m to the entry line. 6. Click the Conversion Operator ( ►) at the top of the Units list, and press Enter to paste it to the entry line. 7. Select _ft from the Length category, and press Enter. 8. Press Enter to evaluate the expression. CAS: Creating a User-defined Unit As with the pre-defined units, user-defined unit names must begin with an underscore symbol.
Using the Unit Conversion Assistant In any application where math input is allowed, you can generate unit conversions using the Unit Conversion Assistant. This can help reduce syntax errors by automatically entering the units for you. Example: Convert 528 minutes to hours. The desired expression is 528•_min►_hr. 1. Type 528 on the entry line. 2. On the Utilities tab, click the Unit Conversions bar. Handheld: Press k 3. 3. Click the Open button next to Conversion Assistant. Handheld: Press ·.
5. Click the From list and select min (minute) . Handheld: Scroll to min (minute) and press ·. Note: You can select Use existing unit at the bottom of the list if you have already entered a unit. In this example, you might have already entered 528•_min. 6. Click the To list and select hr (hour) . Handheld: Scroll to hr (hour) and press ·. 7. Click OK to paste _min►_hr to the entry line. 8. Press Enter to evaluate the expression. Handheld: Press ·.
Note: • The last Category, From, and To selections will be retained until: - the software is closed and re-opened (Desktop) the device is reset (Handheld) the language is changed, or the app is uninstalled or upgraded (iPad) • Inserting a conversion into a Notes text field will automatically create a Math Box. • Inserting a conversion into an empty line in the Calculator will automatically insert Ans before the conversion.
Category Units m (meter) mm (micron) mi (mile) mil (1/1000 inch) mm (millimeter) nm (nanometer) Nmi (nautical mile) pc (parsec) rod (rod) yd (yard) Area acre (acre) cm2 dm2 ft2 ha (hectare) in2 km2 m2 mi 2 mm2 yd2 Volume cm3 cup (cup) dm3 ft3 floz (US fluid ounce) flozUK (British fluid ounce) gal (US gallon) galUK (British gallon) in3 l (liter) m3 ml (milliliter) pt (pint) qt (quart) tbsp (tablespoon) tsp (teaspoon) yd3 Calculator Application 135
Category Units Time day (day) hr (hour) min (minute) ms (millisecond) ms (microsecond) ns (nanosecond) s (second) week (week) yr (year) Velocity ft/min ft/s knot (knot) km/h km/min km/s m/s mi/h mi/min mi/s Temperature ¡C (Celsius) ¡F (Fahrenheit) K (kelvin) ¡R (Rankine) Mass amu (atomic mass unit) gm (gram) kg (kilogram) lb (pound) mg (milligram) mton (metric ton) oz (ounce) slug (slug) ton (ton) tonUK (long ton) Force dyne (dyne) kgf (kilogram force) lbf (pound force) N (newton) tonf (ton force
Category Units Energy BTU (British thermal unit) cal (calorie) erg (erg) eV (electron volt) ftlb (foot-pound) J (joule) kcal (kilocalorie) kJ (kilojoule) kgf*m kWh (kilowatt-hour) latm (liter-atmosphere) Power hp (horsepower) kW (kilowatt) PS (metric horsepower) W (watt) Pressure atm (atmosphere) bar (bar) inH O (inches of water) 2 inHg (inches of mercury) kPa (kilopascal) kgf/cm2 lbf/in2 mbar (millibar) mmH O (millimeters of water) 2 mmHg (millimeters of mercury) N/m2 Pa (pascal) psi (pounds per squ
Creating User-defined Functions and Programs You can use the Define command to create your own functions and programs. You can create them in the Calculator application or in the Program Editor and then use them in other TI-Nspire™ applications. For more information, see Overview of the Program Editor and Libraries. Defining a Single-line Function Suppose you want to define a function named cube() that calculates the cube of a number or variable. 1.
3. Insert the If...Then...Else...EndIf template. From the Functions & Programs menu, select Control, and then select If...Then...Else...EndIf . Calculator inserts the template. 4. Type the remaining parts of the function, using the arrow keys to move the cursor from line to line. 5. Press Enter to complete the definition. 6. Evaluate g(3,-7) to test the function. Defining a Multiple-line Function Manually Within a multi-line template such as Func...EndFunc or If...
1. On the Calculator entry line, type Define sumIntegers(x)=. Do not press Enter yet. 2. Insert the Func...EndFunc template. From the Functions & Programs menu, select Func...EndFunc. Calculator inserts the template. 3. Type the following lines, pressing @ or Alt+Enter at the end of each line. 4. After typing Return tmpsum, press Enter to complete the definition. 5. Evaluate sumIntegers(5) to test the function. Defining a Program Defining a program is similar to defining a multiple-line function.
3. Insert the If...Then...Else...EndIf template. From the Functions & Programs menu, select Control, and then select If...Then...Else...EndIf . 4. Type the remaining parts of the function, using the arrow keys to move the cursor from line to line. Use the Symbol Palette to select the "≤“ symbol. 5. Press Enter to complete the definition. 6. Execute prog1(3,-7)to test the program. Recalling a Function or Program Definition You might want to reuse or modify a function or program that you have defined. 1.
Editing Calculator Expressions Although you cannot edit an expression in the Calculator history, you can copy all or part of an expression from the history and paste it to the entry line. You can then edit the entry line. Positioning the Cursor in an Expression ▶ Press Tab, ◄, ►, ▲, or ▼ to move the cursor through the expression. The cursor moves to the closest valid position in the direction that you press.
Using the Finance Solver 1. Open the Finance Solver. From the Finance menu, click Finance Solver. The Finance Solver displays its default values (or previous values, if you have already used the solver in the current problem). 2. Enter each known value, using Tab to cycle through the items. • • • The help information at the bottom of the Finance Solver describes each item. You might need to temporarily skip the value that you want to calculate.
Finance Functions Included In addition to the Finance Solver, TI-Nspire™ built-in finance functions include: • TVM functions for calculating future value, present value, number of payments, interest rate, and payment amount. • Amortization information such as amortization tables, balance, sum of interest payments, and sum of principal payments. • Net present value, internal rate of return, and modified rate of return.
Copying a Calculator History Item to the Entry Line You can quickly copy an expression, subexpression, or result from the history into the entry line. 1. Press ▲ or ▼ to move through the history and select the item that you want to copy. —or— Select part of the expression or result by using Shift in combination with the arrow keys. Note: The float setting for the current document may limit the number of decimal places displayed in a result.
Windows®: Press Ctrl+C. Mac®: Press “+C. Handheld: Press / C. 4. Place the cursor at the location where you want the copy. 5. Paste the copy. Windows®: Press Ctrl+V. Mac®: Press “+V. Handheld: Press / V. Note: If you copy an expression that uses variables into a different problem, the values of those variables are not copied. You must define the variables in the problem where you paste the expression.
Using Variables A variable is a defined value that can be used multiple times in a problem. You can define a value or function as a variable within each application. Within a problem, variables are shared by TI-Nspire™ applications. For example, you can create a variable in Calculator, and then use or modify it in Graphs & Geometry or Lists & Spreadsheet within the same problem. Each variable has a name and a definition and the definition can be changed.
Data type Examples Expression xmin/10 2+3i (xN2) 2 2.54 1.25E6 2p List {2, 4, 6, 8} Matrix {1, 1, 2} {"red", "blue", "green"} This can be entered as: [1,2,3;3,6,9] Character string “Hello” “xmin/10” “The answer is:” Function, program myfunc( arg ) ellipse( x, y, r1, r2 ) Measurement area, perimeter, length, slope, angle When you click or press h on a handheld to open the list of stored variables, a symbol indicates the type.
This means: Calculate 5+83 and store the result as a variable named num. 4. Press ·. Calculator creates the variable num and stores the result there. Creating a Variable in the Computer Software When creating a variable in the computer software, use the following conventions. As alternatives to using & (store), you can use “:=” or the Define command. All of the following statements are equivalent.
Creating a Variable from a Graphs & Geometry Value 1. Click the value to store as a variable. 2. Click . Handheld: Press h. The Variables options are displayed with Store Var highlighted. 3. Press ·. VAR := appears before the selected value. This is the default name. 4. Replace the default name VAR with the variable name you want to give the value. 5. When the variable name is typed, press ·.
The value is saved to that variable name, and the stored value or its name appears in bold text to indicate it is a stored value. Note: You can also share a Graphs & Geometry axis end value with other applications. If necessary, click Actions , Show/Hide Axes End Values to display the end values on the horizontal and vertical axes. Click the number for an end value to highlight it in the entry field. Name the variable and store it for use with other applications by using any method described in Step 2.
3. Click Store Var. A formula is inserted into the cell with var as a placeholder for a variable name. 4. Replace the letters “var” with a name for the variable, and press ·. The value is now available as a variable to other applications within the same problem. Note: If a variable with the name you specified already exists in the current problem space, Lists & Spreadsheet displays an error message.
As you type, the system displays a list of variables that begin with the letters you typed. Typing part of the name enables you to locate a variable more quickly if the list is long. 4. When you locate and highlight the name of the variable you want to use, click the name. —or— Press ·. The selected variable value is linked. Linking a Lists & Spreadsheet Cell to a Variable When you link a cell to a variable, Lists & Spreadsheet keeps the cell value updated to reflect the current value of the variable.
Using a Variable in a Calculation After storing a value in a variable, you can use the variable name in an expression as a substitute for the stored value. 1. Enter the expression: - Type 4*25*num^2 on the entry line, and press Enter. - Handheld: Type 4 r 25 r num q on the entry line, and press ·. Calculator substitutes 517, the value currently assigned to num, and evaluates the expression. 2. Enter the expression: - Type 4*25*nonum^2, and press Enter.
• Characters can consist of letters, digits, and the underscore character (_). Letters can be U.S. or Greek letters (but not Π or p), accented letters, and international letters. • Do not use c or n from the symbol palette to construct a variable name such as c1 or n12. These may appear to be letters, but they are treated internally as special symbols. • You can use uppercase or lowercase letters. The names AB22, Ab22, aB22, and ab22 all refer to the same variable.
Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider A slider control lets you interactively adjust or animate the value of a numeric variable. You can insert sliders in the Graphs, Geometry, Notes, and Data & Statistics applications. Horizontal slider for adjusting variable v1. Minimized vertical slider for adjusting variable v2. Note: TI-Nspire™ version 4.2 or higher is required for opening .tns files containing sliders on Notes pages. Inserting a Slider Manually 1.
2. Enter the desired values, and click OK. The slider is displayed. On a Graphs, Geometry, or Data & Statistics page, handles are displayed to let you move or stretch the slider. To remove the handles and use the slider, click an empty space in the work area. You can show the handles anytime by selecting Move from the slider's context menu. 3. To adjust the variable, slide the pointer (or click the arrows on a minimized slider).
2. Click an option to select it. Automatic Sliders in Graphs Sliders can be created for you automatically in the Graphs application and in the analytic window of the Geometry application. You are offered automatic sliders when you define certain functions, equations, or sequences that refer to undefined variables. Locking and Unlocking Variables Locking lets you protect variables from modification or deletion. Locking prevents unintended changes to a variable.
Reference function f1 can be locked to prevent unintended change. Variables you Cannot Lock • System variable Ans • stat. and tvm. variable groups Important Information About Locked Variables • To lock variables, use the Lock command. • To modify or delete a locked variable, you must first unlock the item. • Locked variables display a lock icon on the variable menu list. • The Lock command clears the Redo/Undo history when applied to unlocked variables.
Entry Result Comment a := a3 8 Variable a updated with result. a 8 a2 & a 64 a 64 Variable a updated with result. Reusing the Last Answer Each instance of Calculator automatically stores the last calculated result as a variable named Ans. You can use Ans to create a chain of calculations. Note: Do not link to Ans or any system variable. Doing so could prevent the variable from being updated by the system. System variables include statistics results (such as Stat.RegEqn, Stat.dfError, and Stat.
2. Type ans+2*log(45), and press Enter. Handheld: Type ans+2 r log(45), and press ·. Temporarily Substituting a Value for a Variable Use the “|” (such that) operator to assign a value to a variable for just a single execution of the expression. Removing a Linked Variable 1. Select the linked variable. 2. Press h. The Variables options are displayed. 3. Select Unlink. The link is removed from the value, and the value is displayed without any bold formatting.
162
Graphs Application The Graphs application lets you: • Graph and explore functions and other relations, such as inequalities, parametrics, polars, sequences, differential equation solutions, and conics. • Animate points on objects or graphs and explore their behavior. • Link to data created by other applications. Adding a Graphs Page ▶ To start a new document with a blank Graphs page: From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add Graphs . Handheld: Press c, and select Graphs ▶ .
What You Must Know Changing the Graphs and Geometry Settings 1. From the Settings menu in the Documents Toolbox, select Settings . 2. Select the settings that you want to use. - Display Digits. Sets the display format for numbers as Floating or Fixed decimal. - Graphing Angle. Sets the angle unit for all Graphs and 3D Graphing applications in the current docuument. The default setting is Radian. Set this to Auto if you want graphing angles to follow the Angle setting in the main File > Settings menu.
- Click Make Default to apply the current settings to the open document and save them as the default for new Graphs and Geometry documents. Using Context Menus Context menus provide quick access to commonly used commands and tools that apply to a specific object. For example, you can use a context menu to change an object's line color or to group a set of selected objects. ▶ Display the context menu for an object in one of the following ways. - Windows®: Right-click the object.
The Text tool appears in the work area. 2. Click the location for the text. 3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter. 4. To close the Text tool, press ESC. 5. To edit the text, double-click it. Deleting a Relation and its Graph 1. Select the relation by clicking its graph. 2. Press Backspace or DEL. The graph is removed from both the work area and the graph history. Graphing Functions 1. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Function. 2. Type an expression for the function. 3.
Manipulating Functions by Dragging Some types of functions can be translated, stretched, and/or rotated by dragging parts of the graph. As you drag, the expression for the graph updates to reflect the change. Drag graph from the ends to rotate. Drag graph near the middle to translate. Manipulating a Linear Function ▶ To translate, grab near the middle of the graph, and then drag.
▶ To rotate, grab near the ends of the graph, and then drag. Manipulating a Quadratic Function ▶ To translate, grab near the vertex of the graph, and then drag. ▶ To stretch, grab away from the vertex of the graph, and then drag.
Manipulating a Sine or Cosine Function ▶ To translate, grab near the axis of vertical symmetry of the graph, and then drag. ▶ To stretch, grab away from the axis of vertical symmetry of the graph, and then drag. Specifying a Function with Domain Restrictions You can use the entry line or the Calculator application to specify a function with domain restrictions. For multiple domain restrictions on a function, use the piecewise() function.
2. Type the following on the entry line, using spaces to separate the "and" operator: piecewise(3,x>-2 and x<2) 3. Tap Enter to graph the function. Finding Points of Interest on a Function Graph The Graphs application helps you find zeros, minimums, maximums, intersections, derivatives (dy/dx), or integrals. For Graphs defined as conic sections, you can also find foci, directrix, and other points. (CAS) : You can also find the point of inflection.
Identifying Points of Interest with Analysis Tools This example illustrates using the Minimum tool. Other analysis tools operate similarly. 1. From the Analyze Graph menu, select Minimum. The Minimum icon is displayed at the top left on the work area, and a graph? prompt appears in the work area. 2. Click the graph on which you want to find the minimum. A dotted line appears, representing the lower bound of the range to search.
3. Drag the line or click a location to set the lower bound and display a proposed upper bound. 4. Drag the line representing the upper bound, or click a location to set it. The minimum is displayed, along with a text object showing its coordinates.
Graphing a Family of Functions In a family of functions, each member has its own value for one or more of the parameters. By entering the parameters as lists, you can use a single expression to graph a family of up to 16 functions. For example, the expression f1(x) = {-1,0,1,2} • x + {2,4,6,8} denotes the following four functions: f1_1(x ) = -1 • x + 2 f1_2(x ) = 0 • x + 4 f1_3(x ) = 1 • x + 6 f1_4(x ) = 2 • x + 8 To Graph a Family of Functions 1. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Function. 2.
Graphing Equations 1. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Equation. 2. Click the type of equation ( Line, Parabola , Circle, Ellipse, Hyperbola , or Conic). 3. Click the specific template for the equation. For example, tap y=a •x2+b•x+c to define a parabola. The entry line includes a symbol to indicate the type of equation. 4. Type the coefficients into the equation template. 5. Press Enter.
2. Type initial values for the coefficients in the provided spaces. Use the arrow keys to move among the coefficients. 3. Press Enter to graph the equation. Exploring the sample ellipse 1. Drag the ellipse from its center to explore the effect of translation on the equation.
2. Use the analysis tools, such as Analyze Graph > Analyze Conics > Foci to further explore the graph. Note: The type of conic determines which analysis tools you can use. In the case of the ellipse, you can obtain its center, vertices, foci, axes of symmetry, directrices, eccentricity, and latera recta.
3. To explore translation and dilation interactively, define a conic ellipse that uses variables for the h, k , a, and b coefficients. Insert sliders to vary the parameters. Graphing Relations Relation graphing is available on Graphs pages and in the Analytic Window of Geometry pages.
You can define relations using ≤, <, =, >, or ≥. The inequality operator ( ≠) is not supported in relation graphing.
Tips for Graphing Relations ▶ You can quickly define a relation from the Function entry line. Position the cursor to the immediate right of the = sign, and then press the Backspace key. A small menu appears with the relation operators and a Relation option. Choosing from the menu places the cursor in the Relation entry line. ▶ You can type a relation as text on a Graphs page and then drag the text object over either axis. The relation is graphed and added to the relation history.
Graphing Parametric Equations 1. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Parametric. Use the up and down arrow keys to move among the fields in the Parametric entry line. 2. Type expressions for xn( t ) and yn( t ). 3. (Optional) Edit the default values for tmin, tmax , and tstep. 4. Press Enter. Graphing Polar Equations 1. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Polar. 2. Type an expression for rn( θ). 3. (Optional) Edit the default values for θmin, θmax , and θstep.
4. Press Enter. Using the Text Tool to Graph Equations You can graph an "x=" or "y=" equation by typing it into a text box and dragging the text to an axis. You can edit the equation text (for example, change it to an inequality), but you cannot change it between x= and y=. Graphing a Trigonometry Relation from Text 1. From the Actions menu, select Text. 2. Click the work area to place the text box. 3. Type the equation for the trigonometry relation, such as x=sin(y)*2.
4. Press Enter to complete the text object. 5. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the equation. Graphing a Vertical or Horizontal Line from Text 1. From the Actions menu, select Text. 2. Click the work area to place the text box. 3. Type the equation for a vertical line, such as x=4, or a horizontal line, such as y=-2. Click Enter to complete it. 4. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the equation. After plotting a line, you can drag to translate or rotate it.
Graphing an Inequality from Text You can graph inequalities that use the >, <, ≤, or ≥ operators. Areas that satisfy the inequality are shown with shading. If the shaded areas of two or more inequalities overlap, the area of overlap is shaded darker. 1. From the Actions menu, select Text. 2. Click the work area to place the text box. 3. Type the inequality expression, such as x<2*sin(y). Click Enter to complete it. 4. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the inequality. Graphing Scatter Plots 1.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move between the x and y fields. 3. Use one of the following methods to specify lists to plot as x and y. - Click to select names of the predefined list variables. - Type the names of the variables, such as v1. Type lists as comma-separated elements enclosed within brackets, for example: {1,2,3}. 4. Press Enter to plot the data, and then zoom the work area to view the plotted data. Plotting Sequences The Graphs application lets you plot two types of sequences.
3. Type an initial term. If the sequence expression references more than one prior term, such as u1(n-1) and u1(n-2), (or u1(n) and u1(n+1)), separate the terms with commas. 4. Press Enter. Defining a Custom Sequence A custom sequence plot shows the relationship between two sequences by plotting one on the x axis and the other on the y axis. This example simulates the Predator-Prey model from biology. 1.
2. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Sequence > Custom. 3. Specify the rabbit and fox sequences to plot on the x and y axes, respectively. 4. Press Enter to create the custom plot. 5. Zoom the window to the Zoom - Fit setting. 6. Explore the custom plot by dragging the point that represents the initial term.
ODE entry line: • y1 ODE identifier • Expression k·y1 defines the relation • Fields (1,1) for specifying initial condition • Buttons for adding initial conditions and setting plot parameters Slider to vary coefficient k of the ODE Slope field A solution curve passing through the initial condition To Graph a Differential Equation: 1. From the Graph Entry/Edit menu, select Diff Eq. The ODE is automatically assigned an identifier, such as “y1.” 2.
4. (Optional) To study multiple initial conditions for the current ODE, click Add Initial Conditions and enter the conditions. 5. Tap Edit Parameters to set the plot parameters. Select a numerical Solution Method, and then set any additional parameters. You can change these parameters anytime. 6. Click OK.
7. To enter additional ODEs, press the down arrow to display the next ODE edit field. As you move among defined ODEs, the graph is updated to reflect any changes. One solution to the ODE is graphed for each IC specified for each shown ODE (selected by check box). Summary of Differential Equation Settings Solution Method Selects Euler or Runge-Kutta as the numerical solution method. Iterations Between Plot Step Computational accuracy for Euler solution method only. Must be an integer value >0.
when plotting autonomous equations. You can change this parameter only if Field = Direction. Viewing Tables from the Graphs Application You can show a table of values for any relation defined in the current problem. Note: For details about using tables and instructions for accessing tables from the Lists & Spreadsheet application, see Working with Tables. Showing a Table ▶ From the Table menu, select Split-screen Table. The table is displayed with columns of values for the currently defined relations.
2. Modify the expression as needed. 3. Press · to graph the revised function. Renaming a Relation Each relation type has a default naming convention. For example, the default name for functions is fn( x ). (The number represented by n increases as you create more functions.) You can replace the default name with a name of your choice. Note: If you want to use a custom name as a convention, you must enter it manually for each function. 1. In the entry line, delete the existing name.
3. If you are defining a new relation, position the cursor after the = sign and type the expression. 4. Press Enter to graph the relation with its new name. Accessing the Graph History For each problem, the software stores a history of relations defined in the Graphs application and 3D Graphing view, such as function graphs f1 through f99 and 3D function graphs z1 through z99. You can view and edit these items using a button on the entry line. Viewing the History 1. Press Ctrl+G to show the entry line. 2.
1. On the Graph Entry/Edit menu, click the relation type. For example, click Polar to show the entry line for the next available Polar relation. 2. Click the History Menu button , or use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the defined relations of the same type. Zooming/Rescaling the Graphs Work Area Rescaling in the Graphs application affects only the graphs, plots, and objects that reside in the Graphing view. It has no effect on objects in the underlying Plane Geometry view.
On TI-Nspire™ products, fractional input is preserved as-is. Other exact inputs are replaced with the evaluated result. On TI-Nspire™ CAS products, fractional and other exact inputs are preserved. Customizing the Graphs Work Area Inserting a Background Image You can insert an image as a background for any Graphs or Geometry page. 1. From the Insert menu, click Image. 2. Navigate to the image you want to insert, select it, and then click Open.
2. Click the location for the text. 3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter. To move a text object, drag it. To edit the text, double-click it. To delete a text object, display its context menu, and select Delete. Changing the Attributes of Numeric Text If you enter a numeric value as text, you can lock it or set its format and displayed precision. 1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes . 2. Click the numeric text to display its list of attributes. 3.
Changing the Appearance of the Graph Axes 1. From the Actions menu, click Attributes . 2. Click either axis. 3. Press ▲ and ▼ to move to the desired attribute, and then press ◄ and ► to choose the option to apply. Note: To hide the axes or selectively hide or show an individual axis end-value, use the Hide/Show tool. Hiding and Showing Items in the Graphs Application The Hide/Show tool reveals objects you have previously selected as hidden and lets you select which objects to show or hide.
4. To view the hidden objects temporarily or restore them as shown objects, open the Hide/Show tool. Conditional Attributes You can cause objects to hide, show, and change color dynamically, based on specified conditions such as "r1=cos(a2)." For example, you might want to hide an object based on a changing measurement that you have assigned to a variable, or you might want an object’s color to change based on a "Calculate" result assigned to a variable.
3. (Optional) In the Show When field, enter an expression specifying the conditions during which the object will be shown. Anytime the condition is not satisfied, the object will be hidden. You can specify tolerance by using compound conditionals in the Show When input field. For example, area>=4 and area<=6. Note: If you need to see conditionally hidden objects temporarily, click Actions > Hide/Show. To return to normal viewing, press ESC. 4.
3. Click two points to define the bounds. Optionally, you can type numeric values. The area becomes shaded, and the area value is displayed. The value is always non-negative, regardless of the interval direction. Working with Shaded Areas As you change the bounds or redefine the curves, the shading and the area value are updated . • To change the lower or upper bound, drag it or type new coordinates for it. You cannot move a bound that resides on an intersection.
- Handheld: Move the pointer to the shaded area and press / x. Tracing Graphs or Plots Graph Trace lets you move a trace cursor over the points of a graph or plot and displays value information. Tracing Specific Graphs 1. From the Trace menu, select Graph Trace. The Graph Trace tool appears at the top of the work area, the trace cursor appears, and the cursor coordinates are displayed in the lower right corner. 2.
Note: The Trace All tool traces only function graphs, not plots of other relations (polar, parametric, scatter, sequence). 1. From the Trace menu, select Trace All. The Trace All tool appears in the work area, a vertical line indicates the x value of the trace, and the coordinates for each traced point are displayed in the lower right corner. 2. Explore the graphs: - Click a point on the x axis to move all the trace points to that x value. - Press ◄ or ► to step the trace points along all the graphs.
Introduction to Geometric Objects Geometry tools are accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications. You can use these tools to draw and investigate objects such as points, lines, and shapes. • The Graphing view shows the Graphs work area superimposed on the Geometry work area. You can select, measure, and alter objects in both work areas. • The Plane Geometry view shows only the objects created in the Geometry application.
Objects Created in the Geometry Application Points, lines, and shapes created in the Geometry application are not analytic objects. • Points that define these objects do not reside on the graph plane. Objects created here are visible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications, but they are unaffected by changes to the Graphs x,y axes. • You cannot obtain the coordinates of an object’s points.
Creating a Point on a Graph or Object You can create a point on a line, segment, ray, axis, vector, circle, graph, or axis. 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Point On. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Point On.) 2. Click the graph or object on which you want to create the point. 3. Click a location on the object to place the point. Identifying Points of Intersection 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Intersection Points .
3. Click a second location to define the direction of the line and the length of its visible portion. 4. To move a line, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except the identifying point or ends. To extend its visible portion, drag from either end. Creating a Segment 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Segment. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Segment.) 2. Click two locations to define the endpoints of the segment. 3.
To move a ray, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except the identifying point or end. To extend its visible portion, drag from the end. Creating a Tangent You can create a tangent line at a specific point on a geometric object or function graph. 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Tangent. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Tangent.) 2. Click the object to select it. 3. Click a location on the object to create the tangent. 4.
2. Click a location to establish the vector's initial point. 3. Click a second location to specify direction and magnitude and complete the vector. 4. To move a vector, drag any point other than the endpoints. To manipulate the magnitude and/or direction, drag either end point. Note: If you create an endpoint on an axis or another object, you can move the endpoint only along that object. Creating a Circle Arc 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Circle Arc.
As you create a shape, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Circle ). To cancel the shape, press ESC. To enable automatic labeling of certain objects, see What You Must Know, in this chapter. Creating a Circle 1. From the Shapes menu, select Circle. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Circle.) 2. Click a location or point to position the circle’s center point. 3. Click a location or point to establish the radius and complete the circle. 4. To resize a circle, drag its perimeter.
3. To manipulate a triangle, drag any point. To move it, drag any side. Creating a Rectangle 1. From the Shapes menu, select Rectangle. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Rectangle.) 2. Click a location or point to establish the first corner of the rectangle. 3. Click a location for the second corner. One side of the rectangle is displayed. 4. Click to establish the distance to the opposite side and complete the rectangle. 5. To rotate a rectangle, drag one of its first two points.
Creating a Regular Polygon 1. From the Shapes menu, select Regular Polygon. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Regular Polygon.) 2. Click once on the work area to establish the center point. 3. Click a second location to establish the first vertex and radius. A 16-sided regular polygon is formed. The number of sides is displayed in brackets; for example, {16}. 4. Drag any vertex in a circular motion to set the number of sides. - Drag clockwise to reduce the number of sides.
4. To manipulate an ellipse, drag any of its three defining points. To move it, drag its perimeter. Creating a Parabola (from focus and vertex) 1. From the Shapes menu, select Parabola . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Parabola .) 2. Click a location to establish the focus. 3. Click a location to establish the vertex and complete the parabola. 4. To manipulate a parabola, drag its focus or its vertex. To move it, drag it from any other point.
5. To manipulate a parabola, rotate or move its directrix or drag its focus. To move it, select both the directrix and the focus, and then drag either object. Creating a Hyperbola 1. From the Shapes menu, select Hyperbola . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Hyperbola .) 2. Click two locations to establish the foci. 3. Click a third location to complete the hyperbola. 4. To manipulate a hyperbola, drag any of its three defining points.
3. To manipulate a conic, drag any of its five defining points. To move it, drag it from any other place on the shape. Creating Shapes Using Gestures (MathDraw) The MathDraw tool lets you use touchscreen or mouse gestures to create points, lines, circles, and other shapes. MathDraw is available in: • Geometry view without the analytic window displayed. • Graphing view when the x scale and y scale are identical. This avoids non-circular ellipses and non-square rectangles appearing as circles and squares.
• If the point is close to a visible grid location in a Graphs view or the analytic window of a Geometry view, it snaps to the grid. Drawing Lines and Segments To create a line or segment, touch or click the initial position, and then drag to the end position. • If the drawn line passes near an existing point, the line snaps to the point. • If the drawn line starts close to an existing point and ends next to another existing point , it becomes a segment defined by those points.
• If the center of a square is close to an existing point, the square snaps to that point. Drawing Polygons To create a polygon, tap or click a succession of existing points, ending on the first point you tapped. Using MathDraw to Create Equations In the Graphs view, MathDraw attempts to recognize certain gestures as functions for analytic parabolas. Note: The default step value for quantization of the parabola coefficients is 1/32.
Basics of Working with Objects Selecting and Deselecting Objects You can select an individual object or multiple objects. Select multiple objects when you want to quickly move, color, or delete them together. 1. Click an object or graph to select it. The object flashes to indicate selection. 2. Click any additional objects to add them to the selection. 3. Perform the operation (such as moving or setting color). 4. To deselect all objects, click an empty space in the work area.
Note: If an immovable object (such as the graph axes or a point with locked coordinates) is included in a selection or group, you cannot move any of the objects. You must cancel the selection and then select only movable items. To move this...
Pinning Objects Pinning objects prevents accidental changes as you move or manipulate other objects. You can pin graphed functions, geometric objects, text objects, the graph axes, and the background. 1. Select the object or objects to pin, or click an empty area if you are pinning the background. 2. Display the context menu, and select Pin. A pinned object displays a pin icon when you point to it. 3. To unpin an object, display its context menu, and select Unpin.
6. Press ESC to close the Attributes tool. Labeling Points, Geometric Lines, and Shapes 1. Display the context menu of the object. 2. Click Label. 3. Type the text of the label, and then press Enter. The label attaches itself to the object and follows the object as you move it. The label's color matches the object's color. Measuring Objects Measurement values update automatically as you manipulate the measured object.
Measuring Distance Between Two Points, a Point and a Line, or a Point and a Circle 1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Length.) 2. Click the first point. 3. Click the second point or a point on the line or circle. In this example, length is measured from the center of the circle to the upper left vertex of the polygon. Measuring Circumference of a Circle or Ellipse or the Perimeter of a Polygon, Rectangle, or Triangle 1.
Measuring a Side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon 1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Length.) 2. Click two points on the object that form the side you want to measure. Note: You must click two points to measure a side. Clicking the side measures the entire length of the object's perimeter.
Measuring Slope of a Line, Ray, Segment, or Vector 1. From the Measurement menu, select Slope. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Slope.) 2. Click the object to display its slope. The value is updated automatically when you manipulate the object. Measuring Angles Measured angles in the Geometry application range from 0° to 180°. Measured angles in the Graphs application range from 0 radians to π radians. To change the angle unit, use the Settings menu. 1.
Measuring Angles using the Directed Angle Tool 1. From the Measurement menu, select Directed Angle. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Directed Angle.) 2. Click three locations or existing points to define the angle. The second click defines the vertex. 3. To reverse the measurement orientation, a) On the Actions menu, select Attributes . b) Click the angle text. For example, click 300°. c) Select the orientation attribute, and use the right or left arrow key to change it.
Moving a Measured Value ▶ Drag the measurement to the desired location. Note: If you move a measurement too far from its object, it stops following the object. However, its value continues to be updated as you manipulate the object. Editing a Measured Length You can set the length of a side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon by editing its measured value. ▶ Double-click the measurement, and then enter the new value.
Locking or Unlocking a Measurement 1. Display the measurement's context menu, and select Attributes . 2. Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the Lock attribute. 3. Use the left/right arrow keys to close or open the lock. As long as the value remains locked, manipulations are not allowed that would require the measurement to change. Transforming Objects You can apply transformations to drawn objects in both the Graphs and Geometry applications.
4. Click the predefined reflection line or segment. A reflected image of the object is displayed. 5. Manipulate the original object or the line of symmetry to explore the reflection. Exploring Translation 1. (Optional) Create a vector to predefine the distance and direction of translation. 2. From the Transformation menu, select Translation. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Transformation > Translation.) 3. Click the object whose translation you want to explore. 4. Click the predefined vector.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Rotation. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Transformation > Rotation.) 3. Click the object whose rotation you want to explore. 4. Click a location or point to define the point of rotation. 5. Click the points of the predefined angle. —or— Click three locations to define an angle of rotation. A rotated image of the object is displayed. 6. Manipulate the original object or the point of rotation to explore the rotation. Exploring Dilation 1.
6. Manipulate the original object or the center point of dilation to explore the dilation. You can also edit the dilation factor. Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools While a construction is in progress, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Parallel ). To cancel, press ESC. Creating a Midpoint This tool lets you bisect a segment or define a midpoint between any two points. The points can be on a single object, on separate objects, or on the work area. 1.
Creating a Parallel Line This tool creates a parallel line with respect to any existing line. The existing line can be a Graphs axis or any side of a triangle, square, rectangle, or polygon. 1. From the Construction menu, select Parallel. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Construction > Parallel.) 2. Click the object that will serve as the reference line. 3. Click a location to create the parallel line. You can drag the parallel line to move it.
You can drag the intersection point to move the perpendicular. If you manipulate the reference object, the line remains perpendicular. Creating a Perpendicular Bisector You can create a perpendicular bisector on a segment, on one side of a triangle, rectangle, or polygon, or between any two points. 1. From the Construction menu, select Perpendicular Bisector. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Construction > Perpendicular Bisector.) 2. Click the item that will serve as the reference line.
The angle bisector adjusts automatically as you manipulate its defining points. Creating a Locus The Locus tool enables you to explore the range of motion of one object with respect to another object as constrained by a shared point. 1. Create a segment, line, or circle. 2. Create a point on the segment, line, or circle. 3. Create another object that uses the point created in the previous step.
Circle created to use the defined point on the segment. 4. From the Construction menu, select Locus . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Construction > Locus .) 5. Click the point shared by the objects. 6. Click the object defined to share the point (this is the object to vary). The continuous locus is displayed. Creating a Compass This tool operates similarly to a geometric compass used for drawing circles on paper. 1. From the Construction menu, select Compass .
—or— Click any two existing points or locations on the work area. 3. Click a location to establish the center of the circle and complete the construction. The radius adjusts automatically as you manipulate the original segment, side, or points used to define the radius. Animating Points on Objects You can animate any point created as a point on an object or graph. Multiple points can be animated simultaneously. Animating a Point 1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes . 2.
Resetting All Animations Resetting pauses all animations and returns all animated points to the positions they occupied when they were first animated. ▶ To reset animation, click Reset . Changing or Stopping the Animation of a Point 1. Click Reset to stop all animation. 2. From the Actions menu, select Attributes . 3. Click the point to display its attributes. 4. Select the animation attribute, and type a new animation speed. To stop the point’s animation, enter zero.
Note: TI-Nspire™ version 4.2 or higher is required for opening .tns files containing sliders on Notes pages. Inserting a Slider Manually 1. From a Graphs, Geometry, or Data & Statistics page, select Actions > Insert Slider. —or— From a Notes page, make sure the cursor is not in a math box or chem box, and then select Insert > Insert Slider. The Slider Settings screen opens. 2. Enter the desired values, and click OK. The slider is displayed.
1. Display the slider's context menu. 2. Click an option to select it. Automatic Sliders in Graphs Sliders can be created for you automatically in the Graphs application and in the analytic window of the Geometry application. You are offered automatic sliders when you define certain functions, equations, or sequences that refer to undefined variables.
3. Press Esc to close the tool. If you later move the point to a different location, the coordinates follow the point and update automatically. Displaying the Equation of a Geometric Object You can display the equation of a line, tangent line, circle shape, or geometric conic, provided the object was constructed in the Graphing View or within the Analytic Window of the Plane Geometry View.
5. Press Esc to exit the tool. Using the Calculate Tool The Calculate tool is available in the Graphs and Geometry applications. It lets you evaluate a math expression you have entered as a text object. The following example uses the Calculate tool to sum the measured angles of a triangle. 1. Using the Shapes menu, create a triangle, and then measure its angles. Tip: You can enable options to automatically label points and to force geometric triangle angles to integers.
4. From the Actions menu, click Calculate. 5. Click the formula you created. You are prompted to select a value for each term in the formula. 6. Click each angle measurement when prompted. Note: If you have stored a measurement as a variable, you can select it when prompted by clicking . If the name of a stored measurement matches a term in the formula, you can press “L” when prompted for that term. After you have selected the third term, the calculation result attaches itself to the pointer. 7.
240
3D Graphs The 3D Graphing view lets you create and explore three-dimensional graphs of: • 3D functions of the form z(x,y) • 3D parametric plots Selecting the 3D Graphing View The 3D Graphing View is available on any Graphs page or Geometry page . ▶ From the View menu, select 3D Graphing. 3D Graphs Menu Entry line. Lets you define 3D graphs. The default graph type is 3D Function, indicated by z 1(x,y )=. 3D Graphs Work Area. Shows a 3D box containing graphs that you define. Drag to rotate the box.
3. Press Enter to create the graph and hide the entry line. You can show or hide the entry line anytime by pressing Ctrl+G. Graphing 3D Parametric Equations 1. In the 3D Graphing view, select 3D Graph Entry/Edit > Parametric. The entry line appears. 2. Type the equations that define the graph. 3. Press Enter to draw the graph and hide the entry line and keyboard. You can show or hide the entry line anytime by pressing Ctrl+G.
4. To set the graphing parameters tmin, tmax , umin, and umax , display the graph's context menu, and select Edit Parameters . Rotating the 3D View Rotating Manually 1. Press R to activate the Rotation tool (required only for the TI-Nspire™ handheld with Clickpad). 2. Press any of the four arrow keys to rotate the graph. Rotating Automatically Auto rotation is equivalent to holding down the right arrow key. 1. Press A. The Auto Rotation icon appears, and the graph rotates. 2.
- Press letter O to view from the default orientation. Editing a 3D Graph 1. Double-click the graph to show its expression in the entry line. —or— Display the graph’s context menu, and then click Edit Relation. 2. Modify the existing expression, or type a new expression in the entry line. 3. Press Enter.
Changing the Appearance of a 3D Graph Setting Wire and Surface Color: 1. Display the graph’s context menu, click Color, and then click Line Color or Fill Color. 2. Click a color swatch to apply it. Setting Custom Plot Colors: You can assign different colors to a graph's top and bottom surfaces or choose to have the graph colored automatically, based on height or steepness. You can also set the wire color. 1. Display the graph’s context menu, and then click Color > Custom Plot Color. 2.
- x resolution (enter a value in range 2-200*, default=21) - y resolution (enter a value in range 2-200*, default=21) - transparency (enter a value in range 0-100, default=30) * Handhelds are limited to a maximum display resolution of 21, regardless of the value entered. 2. Set the attributes as you like, and then press Enter to accept the changes. Showing or Hiding a Graph’s Label ▶ Display the graph’s context menu, and then click Hide Label or Show Label. Showing and Hiding 3D Graphs 1.
Orthographic Projection (default) Perspective View Setting the Visual Attributes of the Box and Axes 1. Display the context menu for the box, and then click Attributes . You can set the following attributes. - Show or hide tic labels - Show or hide end values - Show or hide arrows on axes - Show 3D or 2D arrow heads 2. Set the attributes as you like, and then press Enter to accept the changes. Shrinking or Magnifying the 3D View ▶ From the Range/Zoom menu, click Shrink Box or Magnify Box.
- YMin (default=-5) YMax (default=5) YScale (default=Auto) You can enter a numeric value. - ZMin (default=-5) ZMax (default=5) ZScale (default=Auto) You can enter a numeric value. - eye q¡ (default=35) eye f¡ (default=160) eye distance (default=11) Tracing in the 3D View 1. From the Trace menu, select z Trace. The z Trace icon and the trace plane appear, along with a text line showing the current "z=" trace value. 2. To move the trace, hold down Shift and press the up or down arrow key.
2. Enter or select the settings, and click OK to apply them. 3. If you are not already tracing, your new settings take effect the next time you trace. Example: Creating an Animated 3D Graph 1. Insert a new problem and select the 3D Graphing view. 2. From the Actions menu, select Insert Slider, click to position it, and type time as the variable name. 3. Display the slider’s context menu, click Settings , and enter the following values. Value: 3.8 Minimum: 3.2 Maximum: 4.4 Step Size: 0.1 4.
- Change the background color of the work area. Hide the box, axes, or legend. Automatically rotate the graph. Change the graph's fill color and hide its lines. Change the graph’s transparency and shading. 7. To animate the graph, display the slider’s context menu, and click Animate. (To stop, click Stop Animate from the context menu.) You can combine manual or auto rotation with the slider animation. Experiment with the x and y resolution to balance curve definition against animation smoothness.
Geometry Application The Geometry application lets you: • Create and explore geometric objects and constructions. • Manipulate and measure geometric objects. • Animate points on objects and explore their behavior. • Explore object transformations. Adding a Geometry Page ▶ To start a new document with a blank Geometry page: From the main File menu, click New Document, and then click Add Geometry. Handheld: Press c, and select Geometry ▶ .
- Display Digits. Sets the display format for numbers as Floating or Fixed decimal. - Graphing Angle. Sets the angle unit for all Graphs and 3D Graphing applications in the current docuument. The default setting is Radian. Set this to Auto if you want graphing angles to follow the Angle setting in the main File > Settings menu. An angle mode indicator shows the resulting mode in Graphs and 3D Graphing applications. - Geometry Angle.
Using Context Menus Context menus provide quick access to commonly used commands and tools that apply to a specific object. For example, you can use a context menu to change an object's line color or to group a set of selected objects. ▶ Display the context menu for an object in one of the following ways. - Windows®: Right-click the object. - Mac®: Hold “ and click the object. - Handheld: Move the pointer to the object, and then press / b .
3. Type the text in the box that appears, and then press Enter. 4. To close the Text tool, press ESC. 5. To edit the text, double-click it. Deleting a Relation and its Graph 1. Select the relation by clicking its graph. 2. Press Backspace or DEL. The graph is removed from both the work area and the graph history. Introduction to Geometric Objects Geometry tools are accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications.
The circle arc and polygon were created in the Geometry application. The sine wave and conic were created in the Graphs application. Objects Created in the Geometry Application Points, lines, and shapes created in the Geometry application are not analytic objects. • Points that define these objects do not reside on the graph plane. Objects created here are visible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications, but they are unaffected by changes to the Graphs x,y axes.
Creating Points and Lines As you create an object, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Segment ). To cancel, press ESC. To enable automatic labeling of certain objects, see What You Must Know in this chapter. Creating a Point on the Work Area 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Point. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Point.) 2. Click a location to create the point. 3. (Optional) Label the point. 4. To move a point, drag it.
Identifying Points of Intersection 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Intersection Points . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Intersection Points.) 2. Click two intersecting objects to add points at their intersections. Creating a Line 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Line. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Line.) 2. Click a location to define one point on the line. 3.
4. To move a line, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except the identifying point or ends. To extend its visible portion, drag from either end. Creating a Segment 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Segment. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Segment.) 2. Click two locations to define the endpoints of the segment. 3. To move a segment, drag any point other than an endpoint. To manipulate the direction or length, drag either endpoint.
To move a ray, drag its identifying point. To rotate it, drag any point except the identifying point or end. To extend its visible portion, drag from the end. Creating a Tangent You can create a tangent line at a specific point on a geometric object or function graph. 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Tangent. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Points and Lines > Tangent.) 2. Click the object to select it. 3. Click a location on the object to create the tangent. 4.
2. Click a location to establish the vector's initial point. 3. Click a second location to specify direction and magnitude and complete the vector. 4. To move a vector, drag any point other than the endpoints. To manipulate the magnitude and/or direction, drag either end point. Note: If you create an endpoint on an axis or another object, you can move the endpoint only along that object. Creating a Circle Arc 1. From the Points and Lines menu, select Circle Arc.
As you create a shape, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Circle ). To cancel the shape, press ESC. To enable automatic labeling of certain objects, see What You Must Know, in this chapter. Creating a Circle 1. From the Shapes menu, select Circle. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Circle.) 2. Click a location or point to position the circle’s center point. 3. Click a location or point to establish the radius and complete the circle. 4. To resize a circle, drag its perimeter.
3. To manipulate a triangle, drag any point. To move it, drag any side. Creating a Rectangle 1. From the Shapes menu, select Rectangle. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Rectangle.) 2. Click a location or point to establish the first corner of the rectangle. 3. Click a location for the second corner. One side of the rectangle is displayed. 4. Click to establish the distance to the opposite side and complete the rectangle. 5. To rotate a rectangle, drag one of its first two points.
Creating a Regular Polygon 1. From the Shapes menu, select Regular Polygon. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Regular Polygon.) 2. Click once on the work area to establish the center point. 3. Click a second location to establish the first vertex and radius. A 16-sided regular polygon is formed. The number of sides is displayed in brackets; for example, {16}. 4. Drag any vertex in a circular motion to set the number of sides. - Drag clockwise to reduce the number of sides.
4. To manipulate an ellipse, drag any of its three defining points. To move it, drag its perimeter. Creating a Parabola (from focus and vertex) 1. From the Shapes menu, select Parabola . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Parabola .) 2. Click a location to establish the focus. 3. Click a location to establish the vertex and complete the parabola. 4. To manipulate a parabola, drag its focus or its vertex. To move it, drag it from any other point.
5. To manipulate a parabola, rotate or move its directrix or drag its focus. To move it, select both the directrix and the focus, and then drag either object. Creating a Hyperbola 1. From the Shapes menu, select Hyperbola . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Shapes > Hyperbola .) 2. Click two locations to establish the foci. 3. Click a third location to complete the hyperbola. 4. To manipulate a hyperbola, drag any of its three defining points.
3. To manipulate a conic, drag any of its five defining points. To move it, drag it from any other place on the shape. Creating Shapes Using Gestures (MathDraw) The MathDraw tool lets you use touchscreen or mouse gestures to create points, lines, circles, and other shapes. MathDraw is available in: • Geometry view without the analytic window displayed. • Graphing view when the x scale and y scale are identical. This avoids non-circular ellipses and non-square rectangles appearing as circles and squares.
• If the point is close to a visible grid location in a Graphs view or the analytic window of a Geometry view, it snaps to the grid. Drawing Lines and Segments To create a line or segment, touch or click the initial position, and then drag to the end position. • If the drawn line passes near an existing point, the line snaps to the point. • If the drawn line starts close to an existing point and ends next to another existing point , it becomes a segment defined by those points.
• If the center of a square is close to an existing point, the square snaps to that point. Drawing Polygons To create a polygon, tap or click a succession of existing points, ending on the first point you tapped. Using MathDraw to Create Equations In the Graphs view, MathDraw attempts to recognize certain gestures as functions for analytic parabolas. Note: The default step value for quantization of the parabola coefficients is 1/32.
Basics of Working with Objects Selecting and Deselecting Objects You can select an individual object or multiple objects. Select multiple objects when you want to quickly move, color, or delete them together. 1. Click an object or graph to select it. The object flashes to indicate selection. 2. Click any additional objects to add them to the selection. 3. Perform the operation (such as moving or setting color). 4. To deselect all objects, click an empty space in the work area.
Note: If an immovable object (such as the graph axes or a point with locked coordinates) is included in a selection or group, you cannot move any of the objects. You must cancel the selection and then select only movable items. To move this...
Pinning Objects Pinning objects prevents accidental changes as you move or manipulate other objects. You can pin graphed functions, geometric objects, text objects, the graph axes, and the background. 1. Select the object or objects to pin, or click an empty area if you are pinning the background. 2. Display the context menu, and select Pin. A pinned object displays a pin icon when you point to it. 3. To unpin an object, display its context menu, and select Unpin.
6. Press ESC to close the Attributes tool. Labeling Points, Geometric Lines, and Shapes 1. Display the context menu of the object. 2. Click Label. 3. Type the text of the label, and then press Enter. The label attaches itself to the object and follows the object as you move it. The label's color matches the object's color. Measuring Objects Measurement values update automatically as you manipulate the measured object.
Measuring Distance Between Two Points, a Point and a Line, or a Point and a Circle 1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Length.) 2. Click the first point. 3. Click the second point or a point on the line or circle. In this example, length is measured from the center of the circle to the upper left vertex of the polygon. Measuring Circumference of a Circle or Ellipse or the Perimeter of a Polygon, Rectangle, or Triangle 1.
Measuring a Side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon 1. From the Measurement menu, select Length. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Length.) 2. Click two points on the object that form the side you want to measure. Note: You must click two points to measure a side. Clicking the side measures the entire length of the object's perimeter.
Measuring Slope of a Line, Ray, Segment, or Vector 1. From the Measurement menu, select Slope. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Slope.) 2. Click the object to display its slope. The value is updated automatically when you manipulate the object. Measuring Angles Measured angles in the Geometry application range from 0° to 180°. Measured angles in the Graphs application range from 0 radians to π radians. To change the angle unit, use the Settings menu. 1.
Measuring Angles using the Directed Angle Tool 1. From the Measurement menu, select Directed Angle. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Measurement > Directed Angle.) 2. Click three locations or existing points to define the angle. The second click defines the vertex. 3. To reverse the measurement orientation, a) On the Actions menu, select Attributes . b) Click the angle text. For example, click 300°. c) Select the orientation attribute, and use the right or left arrow key to change it.
Moving a Measured Value ▶ Drag the measurement to the desired location. Note: If you move a measurement too far from its object, it stops following the object. However, its value continues to be updated as you manipulate the object. Editing a Measured Length You can set the length of a side of a Triangle, Rectangle, or Polygon by editing its measured value. ▶ Double-click the measurement, and then enter the new value.
Locking or Unlocking a Measurement 1. Display the measurement's context menu, and select Attributes . 2. Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the Lock attribute. 3. Use the left/right arrow keys to close or open the lock. As long as the value remains locked, manipulations are not allowed that would require the measurement to change. Transforming Objects You can apply transformations to drawn objects in both the Graphs and Geometry applications.
4. Click the predefined reflection line or segment. A reflected image of the object is displayed. 5. Manipulate the original object or the line of symmetry to explore the reflection. Exploring Translation 1. (Optional) Create a vector to predefine the distance and direction of translation. 2. From the Transformation menu, select Translation. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Transformation > Translation.) 3. Click the object whose translation you want to explore. 4. Click the predefined vector.
2. From the Transformation menu, select Rotation. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Transformation > Rotation.) 3. Click the object whose rotation you want to explore. 4. Click a location or point to define the point of rotation. 5. Click the points of the predefined angle. —or— Click three locations to define an angle of rotation. A rotated image of the object is displayed. 6. Manipulate the original object or the point of rotation to explore the rotation. Exploring Dilation 1.
6. Manipulate the original object or the center point of dilation to explore the dilation. You can also edit the dilation factor. Exploring with Geometric Construction Tools While a construction is in progress, a tool appears in the work area (for example, Parallel ). To cancel, press ESC. Creating a Midpoint This tool lets you bisect a segment or define a midpoint between any two points. The points can be on a single object, on separate objects, or on the work area. 1.
Creating a Parallel Line This tool creates a parallel line with respect to any existing line. The existing line can be a Graphs axis or any side of a triangle, square, rectangle, or polygon. 1. From the Construction menu, select Parallel. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Construction > Parallel.) 2. Click the object that will serve as the reference line. 3. Click a location to create the parallel line. You can drag the parallel line to move it.
You can drag the intersection point to move the perpendicular. If you manipulate the reference object, the line remains perpendicular. Creating a Perpendicular Bisector You can create a perpendicular bisector on a segment, on one side of a triangle, rectangle, or polygon, or between any two points. 1. From the Construction menu, select Perpendicular Bisector. (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Construction > Perpendicular Bisector.) 2. Click the item that will serve as the reference line.
The angle bisector adjusts automatically as you manipulate its defining points. Creating a Locus The Locus tool enables you to explore the range of motion of one object with respect to another object as constrained by a shared point. 1. Create a segment, line, or circle. 2. Create a point on the segment, line, or circle. 3. Create another object that uses the point created in the previous step.
Circle created to use the defined point on the segment. 4. From the Construction menu, select Locus . (In the Graphs application, click Geometry > Construction > Locus .) 5. Click the point shared by the objects. 6. Click the object defined to share the point (this is the object to vary). The continuous locus is displayed. Creating a Compass This tool operates similarly to a geometric compass used for drawing circles on paper. 1. From the Construction menu, select Compass .
—or— Click any two existing points or locations on the work area. 3. Click a location to establish the center of the circle and complete the construction. The radius adjusts automatically as you manipulate the original segment, side, or points used to define the radius. Using Geometry Trace The Geometry Trace tool leaves a visible trail of a geometric object or function graph as it is moved or manipulated. The movement can be done manually or by using animation.
Note: You cannot select or manipulate the trace trail. 4. To erase all trails, select Erase Geometry Trace from the Trace menu. 5. To stop tracing, press Esc. Conditional Attributes You can cause objects to hide, show, and change color dynamically, based on specified conditions such as "r1=cos(a2).
For 2D objects For 3D objects 3. (Optional) In the Show When field, enter an expression specifying the conditions during which the object will be shown. Anytime the condition is not satisfied, the object will be hidden. You can specify tolerance by using compound conditionals in the Show When input field. For example, area>=4 and area<=6. Note: If you need to see conditionally hidden objects temporarily, click Actions > Hide/Show. To return to normal viewing, press ESC. 4.
2. Click objects to toggle their hide/show status. 3. Press Esc to complete your selections and close the tool. All objects you selected as hidden objects disappear. 4. To view the hidden objects temporarily or restore them as shown objects, open the Hide/Show tool. Customizing the Geometry Work Area Inserting a Background Image You can insert an image as a background for any Graphs or Geometry page. 1. From the Insert menu, click Image. 2.
To move a text object, drag it. To edit the text, double-click it. To delete a text object, display its context menu, and select Delete. Changing the Attributes of Numeric Text If you enter a numeric value as text, you can lock it or set its format and displayed precision. 1. From the Actions menu, select Attributes . 2. Click the numeric text to display its list of attributes. 3. Press 9 and : to move through the list. 4. At each attribute icon, press 7 or 8 to move through the options.
Pausing and Resuming All Animations ▶ To pause all animations on a page, click Pause ▶ To resume all animations, click Play . . Resetting All Animations Resetting pauses all animations and returns all animated points to the positions they occupied when they were first animated. ▶ To reset animation, click Reset . Changing or Stopping the Animation of a Point 1. Click Reset to stop all animation. 2. From the Actions menu, select Attributes . 3. Click the point to display its attributes. 4.
Horizontal slider for adjusting variable v1. Minimized vertical slider for adjusting variable v2. Note: TI-Nspire™ version 4.2 or higher is required for opening .tns files containing sliders on Notes pages. Inserting a Slider Manually 1. From a Graphs, Geometry, or Data & Statistics page, select Actions > Insert Slider. —or— From a Notes page, make sure the cursor is not in a math box or chem box, and then select Insert > Insert Slider. The Slider Settings screen opens. 2.
Working with the Slider Use the options on the context menu to move or delete the slider, and to start or stop its animation. You can also change the slider's settings. 1. Display the slider's context menu. 2. Click an option to select it. Automatic Sliders in Graphs Sliders can be created for you automatically in the Graphs application and in the analytic window of the Geometry application.
Tip: You can enable options to automatically label points and to force geometric triangle angles to integers. For more information, see What You Must Know, in this chapter. 2. From the Actions menu, click Text. 3. Click a location for the text, and type the formula for the calculation. In this example, the formula sums three terms. 4. From the Actions menu, click Calculate. 5. Click the formula you created. You are prompted to select a value for each term in the formula. 6.
7. Position the result, and press Enter to anchor it as a new text object.
296
Lists & Spreadsheet Application The Lists & Spreadsheet application gives you a place to work with tabular data. It lets you: • Store numeric data, text, or math expressions. • Define a table cell in terms of the contents of other cells. • Define an entire column based on the contents of another column. • Share columns of data as list variables with other TI-Nspire™ applications. Also share individual cells as variables.
À Lists & Spreadsheet tools (available when a Lists & Spreadsheet work area is active) Á Â Ã Sample Lists & Spreadsheet work area Lists & Spreadsheet entry line Lists & Spreadsheet data plotted in the Data & Statistics application Creating and Sharing Spreadsheet Data as Lists You can define a column as a named list of elements of the same type of data.
• You can refer to a specific element in a named list from the Calculator application. Use the list name and the element’s position within the list. In a list named Heights, for example, refer to the first element as Heights[1]. The expression Heights[2] refers to the second element, and so on. Linking to an Existing List Variable Linking a column to an existing list variable lets you easily view and edit the values in the list.
Deleting an Element from a List When you delete an element, the remaining list elements shift upward to close the gap. The upward shift affects only the selected column. 1. Click the cell of the element to delete. 2. Open the context menu for the cell, and click Delete Cell. Note: If you press Del or Backspace to clear the contents of the cell instead of deleting the list element, the element is assigned a value of 0 (zero). The remaining list elements do not shift.
—or— Press Tab to complete the entry and move right to the next cell. The Lists & Spreadsheet application automatically recalculates any cells that are dependent on the cell you entered. If you have shared the cell, and other TI-Nspire™ applications are linked to the cell, the other applications are also updated. Note: Empty cells in a spreadsheet display as a void represented by an underscore (_).
The formula is updated as you select the cells. 5. Press Enter to complete the formula and display the result. Navigating in a Spreadsheet A spreadsheet includes a column letter at the top of each column and a row number on the left of each row. The top two rows and the row numbers remain in place as you scroll. You can name a column of data to make it available as a list variable in TI-Nspire™ applications.
Any value that cannot fit in a cell’s width is truncated (143489...). Hover over the cell to display the complete value. Å Entry line (includes cell reference for current cell) You can select any cell to view or edit its contents. When a spreadsheet is larger than the Lists & Spreadsheet work area, you can move to different parts of the spreadsheet by using the Tab key and by pressing shortcut keys.
Changing the Color of Text 1. Select the cells that contain the text to change. You can choose one or more cells in any adjacent cells, columns, or rows. 2. Access the context menu and click Color > Text Color. 3. Click the color to apply to the text. Empty cells in the selection area show the color change when text is added. Understanding Cell References in Formulas Use a cell reference to use data from a cell or range of cells in a formula.
Deleting the Contents of Cells 1. Click a cell to select it. —or— Use the arrow keys to move to the cell. Note: If you are deleting a range of cells, select a cell at one end or corner of the range, and then use Shift with the arrow keys to select the remaining cells in the range. 2. Press Del. Note: Any cell that uses a formula with an absolute reference to deleted data shows an error.
Handheld: Press / V. Important: Paste copied data into a cell that is in the same mode as the cell from which the data was originally copied. Otherwise, a formula could paste as a string enclosed in quotes instead of a formula. Filling Adjacent Cells You can repeat a cell’s formula or value throughout adjacent cells within the row or column. You can also repeat a range of cells horizontally or vertically.
Linking a Cell to a Variable When you link a cell to a variable, Lists & Spreadsheet keeps the cell value updated to reflect the current value of the variable. The variable can be any variable in the current problem and can be defined in Graphs & Geometry, Calculator, Data & Statistics, or any instance of Lists & Spreadsheet. 1. Click the cell that you want to link to a variable. 2. Click on the toolbar, and click Link to. Handheld: Press / h or press h and select Link to. The VarLink menu opens. 3.
- For a column, choose Resize Column Width, Maximize Column Width, or Minimize Column Width. - For a row, you can choose Resize Row Height. The tools that minimize and maximize the column width work automatically. You must manually adjust the size to use the Resize Column Width and Resize Row Height tools. 4. To resize manually, use ◄ and ► to resize the column, or use ▲ and ▼ to resize the row, and then press Enter. Inserting an Empty Row or Column 1.
Note: If other cells contain formulas that refer to the deleted row or column, those cells show an error. Relative references to cells whose positions have changed because of a deletion adjust accordingly. Copying Rows or Columns 1. Click the row number to copy a row, or click the column letter to copy a column. 2. (Optional) To select adjacent rows or columns to copy, hold down Shift and press ◄, ►, ▲, or ▼. 3. Copy the row or column: Windows®: Press Ctrl+C. Mac®: Press “+C. Handheld: Press / C. 4.
Displaying Results as Exact or Approximate You can choose to display a column’s calculated results in Exact (fraction) or Approximate (decimal) form. This affects only the values calculated from a formula. 1. Select the column by clicking the reference letter at the top of the column. Handheld: Hold down ▲ to move past the top cell. 2. Display the context menu for the column. 3. On the context menu, click either Data > Exact or Data > Approximate.
2. From the Actions menu, select Sort. The Sort dialog box opens. 3. Click the column letter to use for ordering. 4. Click Descending or Ascending as the sort method, and then click OK. Note: Sorting a column that is defined by a formula will remove the formula, because it may not be valid after the sort. Generating Columns of Data You can create a column of values based on the contents of another column. You can also create a column based on any of several types of sequential data.
À Á Â Column formula based on a variable Column formula based on another column (column A) Column formula that generates a sequence Notes: • If you generate data in a column that already contains one or more cell values, Lists & Spreadsheet asks for confirmation before replacing the existing values. Proceeding removes all of the existing values in the column. • If you edit a cell manually in a column of generated data, Lists & Spreadsheet asks for confirmation before replacing the generated data.
Generating a Column of Random Numbers This example generates a column of 20 random integers in the range 1 through 6. 1. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column. Lists & Spreadsheet inserts the leading equal sign ( =) for the formula. If the column is a named list, Lists & Spreadsheet inserts listname := followed by the cursor. 2. After the equal sign, type RandInt(1,6,20).
Generating a Numerical Sequence 1. Click any cell in the column in which you want to generate the sequence. 2. From the Data menu, select Generate Sequence. The Sequence dialog box opens. 3. Type the Formula that will be applied to the column values. 4. Type any Initial Terms required by the sequence. Separate them with commas. 5. Type a starting value for the independent variable ( n0). 6. Type a maximum number of values to be generated ( nMax). 7. Type the step value ( nStep). 8.
Graphing Spreadsheet Data You can graph the data in a spreadsheet using Quick Graph or Summary Plot. Lists & Spreadsheet cells that contain no data are not represented by data points on graphs. Using Quick Graph You can easily create a dot plot of the data in one column or a scatter plot of two adjacent columns by using the Quick Graph feature. This feature displays the graphed data using the Data & Statistics application. To create a scatter plot: 1. Name both of the columns to declare them as lists. 2.
4. (Optional) Use the Data & Statistics features to analyze or visually enhance the graph. Note: For more information, see Using Data and Statistics. Creating a Summary Plot from a Summary Table In this example, you create a summary table from raw data, and then use the table to generate a summary plot. For more information, see Using Data & Statistics.
A summary table contains an X (or Y) List and a Summary List. • The X (or Y) List contains numeric or string values (such as 1999 or “color”). Numeric values result in a histogram. String values identify the categories for a bar chart. • The Summary List contains numeric values (such as count, frequency, or probability) for each element in the other list. To Create a Summary Plot: Note: For situations in which you already have a summary table, you can skip the first two steps. 1.
5. If necessary, use Tab and the arrow keys to select the correct lists for X List and Summary List. 6. In the Display On field, select how to display the summary plot in the Data & Statistics application. • Select Split Page to place the chart on half of the current page. • Select New Page to add the chart on a new page. The summary plot is displayed with the list names along the axes and a summary plot symbol in the lower left corner of the chart window.
4. Drag to select the values that you want to copy. To copy an entire list, click the top cell in the list. 5. Click Edit > Copy. 6. In Lists & Spreadsheet, click the cell where you want the data to be pasted. If you have copied a range of cells, they will be pasted so that the upper-left corner of the range is positioned at the selected cell. Any data in those cells will be overwritten. 7. Click Edit > Paste.
1. Drag to select the values that you want to copy from the Excel® spreadsheet. To copy an entire column, click the column identifier at the top of the column. Note: If you select non-contiguous columns in the Excel® spreadsheet, they will be pasted as contiguous columns in Lists & Spreadsheet. 2. Use the standard key shortcut for copying a selection. Windows®: Press Ctrl+C. Mac®: Press “+C. 3. In Lists & Spreadsheet, click the cells where you want the data to be pasted.
A capture expression is inserted into the column formula cell with var as a placeholder for the name of the variable you are capturing. 4. Replace the letters “var” with the name of the variable to capture from Graphs & Geometry. For example, type area. The formula cell now contains an expression similar to =capture(area,0). Note: The argument “0” tells Lists & Spreadsheet that you want to trigger each capture manually. 5. Press Enter. 6.
• Changes in the captured variable only. • Changes in the captured variable or additional variables. This lets you set up multiple columns of synchronized captures, such as the x and y coordinates of a moving object. 1. Clear all columns that you will be using for the captured data. 2. Make sure any data values that you want to capture are linked to variable names. 3. Click the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column in which you want to capture the values. 4.
The formula cell will contain an expression similar to =capture (objpathX,1,objpathY). 7. Press Enter to complete the formula. 8. If you are capturing multiple columns of synchronized data, set up the additional columns. For example, you might set up a second capture variable using =capture(objpathY,1,objpathX). 9. When you are ready to capture the values, begin moving the object or start the animation that affects it in Graphs & Geometry. Each captured value is added to the end of the list.
Input Description m Hypothesized value of the population mean that you are testing. 0 s The known population standard deviation; must be a real number > 0. List The name of the list containing the data you are testing. Frequency List The name of the list containing the frequency values for the data in List. Default=1. All elements must be integers | 0. The frequency values can also be typed as a list, in the format {1, 1, 3, 2}.
Input Description x1 The count of successes from sample one for the 2-Prop z Test and 2-Prop z Interval. Must be an integer | 0. x2 The count of successes from sample two for the 2-Prop z Test and 2-Prop z Interval. Must be an integer | 0. n1 The count of observations in sample one for the 2-Prop z Test and 2-Prop z Interval. Must be an integer > 0. n2 The count of observations in sample two for the 2-Prop z Test and 2-Prop z Interval. Must be an integer > 0.
6. Click OK. Lists & Spreadsheet inserts two columns: one containing the names of the results, and one containing the corresponding values. Note: The results are linked to the source data. For example, if you change a value in column A, the regression equation is updated automatically. Storing Statistical Results Lists & Spreadsheet stores statistical results using a variable-group name with the format stat.nnn, where nnn is the result name (for example, stat.RegEqn and stat.Resid).
=LinRegMx(a[],b[],1 ): CopyVar Stat., MystatsB. Later, you could view the results by entering the following expression in the Calculator application or in another column of the Lists & Spreadsheet application: MystatsB.results Supported Statistical Calculations The Stat Calculations menu lets you select from the calculations described below. For more information, see the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide. One-Variable Statistics (OneVar) Analyzes data with one measured variable.
• Sum of the squared data, Gx 2 or Gy 2 • Sample standard deviation, sx = s • Population standard deviation, sx = s x or sy = s y • X-min or Y-min • First quartile, Q X or Q Y • Median • Third quartile, Q X or Q Y • X-max or Y-max • Sum of squared deviations, SSx = G( x Nx) 2 or SSy = G( y Ny) 2 x or sy = s n-1 n 1 3 y n-1 n 1 3 Additional data: • Sample size for each data set, n • Gxy • Correlation coefficient, R.
Cubic Regression (CubicReg) Fits the third-degree polynomial y=ax3+bx2+cx+d to the data. It displays values for a , b, c, d, and R2. For four points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for five or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least four points are required. Quartic Regression (QuartReg) Fits the fourth-degree polynomial y=ax4+bx3+cx2+dx+e to the data. It displays values for a , b, c, d, e, and R2. For five points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for six or more, it is a polynomial regression.
Distributions Calculating a Distribution Example: Calculate a distribution to fit the Normal Pdf distribution model. 1. Click the column formula cell (second cell from the top) in column A. 2. Click Statistics > Distributions > Normal Pdf to choose the Distribution model. The Normal Pdf dialog box opens and displays fields for typing or selecting the arguments for the calculation. 3. Press Tab as necessary to move from field to field and provide each argument.
Note: The results are linked to the source data. For example, you can change a value in Column A, and the equation updates automatically. Supported Distribution Functions The following distributions are available from the Lists & Spreadsheet application. For more information regarding these functions, see the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide. • To return a single distribution result based on a single value, type the function in a single cell.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of an occurrence of any value between the lower and upper bounds in the normal distribution. It is equivalent to finding the area under the specified normal curve between the bounds. Inverse Normal (invNorm) Computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area under the normal distribution curve specified by mean, μ, and standard deviation, s.
c 2 Pdf (c 2 Pdf()) Computes the probability density function ( pdf ) for the c 2 (chi-square) distribution at a specified x value. df (degrees of freedom) must be an integer > 0. The probability density function ( pdf ) is: This distribution is useful in determining the probability of the occurrence of a given value from a population with a c 2 distribution. The draw option is available when c 2 Pdf is invoked from a formula cell.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability that a single observation falls within the range between the lower bound and upper bound. Binomial Pdf (binomPdf()) Computes a probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability of success (p) on each trial. The x parameter can be an integer or a list of integers. 0{p{1 must be true. numtrials must be an integer > 0. If you do not specify x , a list of probabilities from 0 to numtrials is returned.
Poisson Pdf (poissPdf()) Computes a probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean, μ, which must be a real number > 0. x can be an integer or a list of integers. The probability density function ( pdf ) is: This distribution is useful in determining the probability of obtaining a certain number of successes before a trial begins. For example, you could use this calculation to predict the number of heads that would occur in eight tosses of a coin.
Confidence Intervals Supported Confidence Intervals The following confidence intervals are available from the Lists & Spreadsheets application. For more information regarding these functions, see the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide. z Interval (zInterval) Computes a confidence interval for an unknown population mean, m, when the population standard deviation, s, is known. The computed confidence interval depends on the user-specified confidence level.
1-Prop z Interval (zInterval_1Prop) Computes a confidence interval for an unknown proportion of successes. It takes as input the count of successes in the sample x and the count of observations in the sample n. The computed confidence interval depends on the user-specified confidence level. This test is useful in determining the probability of a given number of successes that can be expected for a given number of trials.
• H : m>m0 a This test is used for large populations that are normally distributed. The standard deviation must be known. This test is useful in determining if the difference between a sample mean and a population mean is statistically significant when you know the true deviation for a population. t test (tTest) Performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean, m, when the population standard deviation, s, is unknown.
1-Prop z Test tests the null hypothesis H : prop=p against one of the alternatives 0 below. • H : propƒp • H : prop
p a 0 0 a 0 a 0 This test is useful in determining if the probability of the success seen in a sample is significantly different from the probability of the population or if it is due to sampling error, deviation, or other factors. 2-Prop z Test (zTest_2Prop) Computes a test to compare the proportion of successes (p and p ) from two 1 2 populations.
Sx1, Sx2 = Sample standard deviations having n N1 and n N1 degrees of 1 2 freedom df , respectively. F = df (x, n N1, 1 n N1) 2 p F-statistic = = Fpdf( ) with degrees of freedom df , n N1, and n N1 1 2 = reported p value 2-Sample FTest for the alternative hypothesis s > s . 1 2 2-Sample FTest for the alternative hypothesis s < s . 1 2 2-Sample FTest for the alternative hypothesis s ƒs .
ANOVA (ANOVA) Computes a one-way analysis of variance for comparing the means of 2 to 20 populations. The ANOVA procedure for comparing these means involves analysis of the variation in the sample data. The null hypothesis H : m1 =m2 =...=mk is tested against the 0 alternative H : not all m1 ...mk are equal. a The ANOVA test is a method of determining if there is a significant difference between the groups as compared to the difference occurring within each group.
To select the Pooled option, select Yes from the drop-down list. Working with Function Tables The Lists & Spreadsheet application lets you show a table of function values for any function in the current problem. You can change the settings for the table, delete columns, add values for multiple functions, and edit the expression that defines a function without leaving the Lists & Spreadsheet application. Switching to a Table 1. While working in the Lists & Spreadsheet application: Windows: Press Ctrl+T.
▶ To change the expression that defines a function, click Edit Expression. You can also edit the expression directly on the entry line beneath the table. Note: When you edit the expression for a function, that function automatically changes in the application used to define the function. For example, if you edit a Graphs & Geometry function in the table, the table values and graph of the function are both updated. ▶ To change the default table settings, choose Edit Table Settings .
344
Data & Statistics Application The Data & Statistics application provides tools to: • Visualize sets of data in different types of plots. • Directly manipulate variables to explore and visualize data relationships. Data changes in one application are dynamically applied to all linked applications. • Explore central tendency and other statistical summary techniques. • Fit functions to data. • Create regression lines for scatter plots.
Normal Probability Plot with expression Ã Ä Data point with coordinates Basic Operations in Data & Statistics The Data & Statistics application lets you explore and visualize data and graph inferential statistics. The Lists & Spreadsheet application can work in conjunction with the Data & Statistics application. The Lists & Spreadsheet Summary Plot and Quick Graph tools automatically add a Data & Statistics application to show plots.
▶ Click the variable name displayed after Caption to use the caseplot. - Choose to remove the default caseplot. - Choose the name of a variable to have it replace the current caseplot variable. - Hover over any data point to see the summary information. - Drag any data point toward an axis to see how the points group. - Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄ or ► to move across points. When you add a variable to either axis, the plot for that variable replaces the default caseplot.
Other options that are appropriate for various plots also appear on the context menu. Selecting Data and Displaying Summary Information When you hover over part of a plot, the Data & Statistics application displays summary information for the data it represents. 1. Hover at an area of interest in a plot to display data values or summary information. For example, you can hover over the center of a box plot to display the median summary data. 2. Click once to select a representation of data in a plot.
The default plot for two variables is a scatter plot. The data points shift to represent the elements of both variables as a scatter plot. 5. (Optional) Repeat Steps 1-3 to choose additional variables to plot on the vertical axis. The name of each variable that you add is appended to the label on the axis. The default data point shape changes to help you distinguish data, and a legend is displayed to identify the shapes. 6. Change, analyze, or explore the plotted data.
You can move a data point only in directions allowed by its definition. If a list is defined with a formula in Lists & Spreadsheet, the points in Data & Statistics may not move because of the formula’s restrictions. For example, you can manipulate a plot that represents the result of y=x, but you can only move along a line. You cannot move points that represent data in a locked variable or data that represents a categorical value. 1.
Raw data Summary table for eye color based on raw data • Raw data consists of a single list, such as a list of eye colors. When you create a plot of raw data, Data & Statistics counts the occurrences for you. Plotting raw data directly gives you flexibility in analyzing it. • A summary table consists of two lists, such as eye colors (the X or Y List) and counts of eye-color occurrences (the Summary List). For more information, see Using Lists & Spreadsheet chapter.
- Drag a dot to move it. As you move a point, the values associated with it change on the work area display and in the list for the variable. - Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄ or ► to move across the data points in the plot in list order. Points enlarge and display a bold outline as you move across them in Trace mode. Creating Box Plots The Box Plot Tool plots one-variable data in a modified box plot. “Whiskers” extend from each end of the box, either to 1.
A modified box plot displays on the Data & Statistics work area. Note: You can split a box plot by category by adding a list that contains corresponding categorical data to the y-axis. 3. (Optional) To add additional variables for comparing box plots on the same axis, click Add X Variable on the Plot Properties menu. For example, you can use multiple box plots to compare the distributions of sample proportions. In the example, true proportion is .5 and sample size varies from n=20 to n=40 to n=90.
- You can create a box plot with frequency by choosing Add X Variable or Add Y Variable on the Plot Properties menu. - You can specify a variable multiple times as you choose variables to plot as box plots. - The variable used to provide frequency information is added to the label on the horizontal axis in the format: x_variablename {frequencylist_name }. 4. Point and click the regions of the box plot to explore and analyze the data it represents.
Plotting Histograms A histogram plots one-variable data and depicts the distribution of data. The number of bins displayed depends on the number of data points and the distribution of these points. A value that occurs on the edge of a bin is counted in the bin to the right. Creating a Histogram from Raw Data 1. Create the list that you want to plot as a histogram. For example, you can enter or collect data as a named list on a Lists & Spreadsheet page. 2.
4. Explore the data. - Hover over a bin to see the information for that bin. - Click a bin to select it. Click the bin again to deselect it. - Drag the side of a bin to adjust bin width and number of bins. Note: The bins are not adjustable in categorical plots or plots in which you choose variable bin widths. - On the Analyze menu, click Graph Trace and press ◄ or ► to cycle through the bins and display their values. Adjusting the Histogram Scale of Raw Data 1.
Creating a Histogram with Frequency or Summary Data 1. On a Lists & Spreadsheet page, create two lists: one containing the “bins,” such as heights in a population ( ht ), and the other containing the frequencies of those heights ( freq). 2. On a Data & Statistics page, access the context menu on the x axis, and click Add X Variable with Summary List. 3. Select ht as the X List and freq as the Summary List. Note: It is up to you to set the data and bins in a meaningful way when using summary data.
Setting Equal Bin Widths By default, bin widths are set to equal. You can specify the width and alignment of equal-width bins. 1. On the Plot Properties menu, click Histogram Properties > Bin Settings , and choose Equal Bin Width. The Equal Bin Width Settings dialog box opens. 2. Type values to set Width and Alignment of the bins. 3. Click OK to apply the changes and redraw the bins. Both the data represented by the bins and the value you type for the alignment affect the placement of bins on the scale.
The Variable Bin Width Settings dialog box opens. 3. Select your boundary list as the List of Bin Boundaries . 4. Click OK to apply the changes and redraw the bins. Note: You cannot change variable bin widths by dragging their boundaries; you must edit the list of boundaries or restore equal-width bins. Creating a Normal Probability Plot A normal probability plot shows one set of data against the corresponding quartile ( z) of the standard normal distribution.
- Click to select a data point. Click again to deselect it. - Click multiple data points to select them. - Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄ or ► to move across the data points and display values. Creating a Scatter Plot A scatter plot shows the relationship between two sets of data. You can also plot a scatter plot by using the Quick Graph tool in the Lists & Spreadsheet application. 1.
4. Optional: To plot additional lists against the x-axis, right-click the y-axis and click Add Variable. Creating an X-Y Line Plot An X-Y line plot is a scatter plot in which the data points are plotted and connected in order of appearance in the two variables. Like scatter plots, these plots depict the relationship between two sets of data. By convention, the left-most column of data is represented on the horizontal axis. 1. Create a scatter plot. For more information, see Creating a Scatter Plot. 2.
• Bar Chart • Pie Chart The categorical plot types can be used to compare the representations of data across different plots. When the same variable (list) is used for a dot chart and a bar chart or pie chart in a problem, selecting a data point or segment in one of the plots selects the corresponding data point, segment, or bar in all other plots that include the variable. Creating a Dot Chart The default plot type for categorical data is the dot chart.
3. Move near the center of either axis and click the Add List region. The list of variables displays. 4. Click the list that contains the categories you want to use for sorting data. A dot chart plots in the work area. The application labels the axis with the variable name and shows a dot for each instance of a category. 5. Explore the plotted data. - Hover over a dot in the plot to display data values. - Click a dot to select it.
1. Click the Add Variable region of either axis and choose the name of a categorical variable. For more information, see Creating a Dot Chart. 2. On the Plot Types menu, click Bar Chart. The dot chart changes to a bar representation of the data. 3. Explore the data in the plot. - Hover over a bar to see a category summary (the number of cases and percentage among all categories). - Activate the Graph Trace tool and press ◄ or ► move across the bars and view summary information.
5. Hover over a bar to see a category summary, or use the Graph Trace tool on the Analyze menu to move across all of the bars displaying the summaries. 6. (Optional) Add summary lists to create a comparative bar chart. Creating a Pie Chart A pie chart represents categorical data in a circular layout and uses an appropriately proportioned segment for each category. 1. Create a dot chart on the work area. 2. On the Plot Types menu, click Pie Chart.
3. Hover over a segment to see the summary for the category, or use the Graph Trace tool on the Analyze menu to move across each segment displaying all of the summaries. The summary shows the number of cases for the category and the percentage among all cases. Note: You can switch to a pie chart from a bar chart generated from summary data. Creating a Comparative Bar Chart This might be used to explore data in a two-way table. 1. Type the raw data on a Lists & Spreadsheet page. 2.
Note: Your screen may differ, depending on the data you entered. 3. Select the Click to add variable field, and select eyecolor as the variable for the x axis. 4. On the Plot Type menu, click Bar Chart. The frequency of the eyecolor data is plotted. 5. To split the eyecolor data by gender, click the Plot Properties menu, click Split Categories by Variable, and then click gender.
Splitting a Numeric Plot by Categories You can use a categorical split to sort the values plotted on an axis. 1. Open a problem that includes a Lists & Spreadsheet page, or create data to be plotted in the Lists & Spreadsheet application. In this example, lists contain dog breed and daily walk information. 2. Click column letter (B). 3. On the Lists & Spreadsheet Data menu, click the Quick Graph tool.
The Quick Graph tool adds a Data & Statistics page. Data & Statistics plots the variable and labels the horizontal axis. 4. To plot the numeric data for each category, hover on the Add Variable region near the center of the vertical axis and click the tooltip Click or Enter to add variable. The list of available variables displays. 5. On the list of variables, click the name of the category variable. Data & Statistics labels the vertical axis and plots the numeric data for each category.
Exploring Data You can manipulate and explore plotted data. Moving Points or Bins of Data 1. Click and hold the desired point or bin. The pointer changes to an open hand ÷. 2. Drag the point or bar to the new location and release it. Moving the point changes the values for x and y. If you are working with data from Lists & Spreadsheet, the data that corresponds to the original point or bar automatically updates in the original column(s) in Lists & Spreadsheet as you move the point.
You can also move points or bins by changing the numbers in the Lists & Spreadsheet or Calculator applications. Data will update in all of the representations. Moving Multiple Points 1. Position the pointer over each data point that you want to select. When the pointer changes to an open hand ÷, click to add the point to the selection. Alternatively, you can drag a selection rectangle around the points to select them. 2. Drag any of the selected points to move them all.
2. On the Actions menu, click Sort, and then click the type of sort. Months listed chronologically but sorted by value (amount of rainfall) Note: You can customize the order of the categories by clicking a label and dragging it. Plotting a Value You can plot a value on an existing plot. It displays as a vertical line in the work area. 1. From the Analyze menu, click Plot Value. A text box with a default expression opens in the work area. 2. Type the value you want to plot, and press Enter.
Note: If you use a frequency table to generate a histogram, reference the frequency list in your expression. For example, type the expression "v1:= mean(List, FreqList)" in the plot value entry box. 3. Click the line to display the value. Note: Double-click the value to edit the expression. Plot value with value displayed You can use Plot value for a single number or any expression that evaluates to a number.
area, you cannot create a box plot without first removing the variable from the yaxis. Rescaling a Graph You can change the scale of the axes by using Translation and Dilation. The pointer changes to indicate whether Translation ( ö) or Dilation ( ô) is available in zones on the axes. Translation A translation slides a set of axes a fixed distance in a given direction. The original axes have the same shape and size. 1. Position the pointer over a tic mark or label in the middle third of the axis.
2. Click to grab. The pointer changes to an open hand ÷. Drag to the desired position and release. Adding a Movable Line You can add a movable line to a plot. Moving and rotating the line on the work area changes the function that describes it. ▶ From the Analyze menu, click Add Movable Line. The movable line displays and is labeled with a function that describes it. For this example, Data & Statistics stores the expression for the movable line in the variable m1. Rotating a Movable Line 1.
The function m1(x) is updated for the changes in the position of the movable line. Changing the Intercept 1. Click in the middle of the movable line. The pointer changes to ö. 2. Drag to change the intercept. The number at the end of the equation changes to show the change in the intercept. Note: The movable line is stored as a function that can be used for prediction in the Calculator application. Locking the Intercept at Zero You can lock the intercept of the movable line at zero.
You can unlock the intercept by choosing Unlock Movable Line Intercept on the Analyze menu. Tracing a Movable Line You can trace a movable line to predict and analyze values. 1. Click the line. The pointer changes. 2. From the Analyze menu, click Graph Trace to enable Trace mode for the line. Rotation of the line is not supported in Trace mode. 3. Press ◄ or ► (left or right arrow keys) to trace the movable line. If the plotted variables change, points on the graph and the line are updated automatically.
Showing Residual Squares You can display residual squares on a plot. Residual squares can help you assess the appropriateness of the model for your data. Note: This tool is only available when a regression or movable line is present in the work area. ▶ From the Analyze menu, click Residuals > Show Residual Squares . The sum of squares is updated as the line or data changes. Showing a Residual Plot You can show a residual plot to determine how well a line fits data.
Notes: • With multiple regressions or functions and movable lines plotted, you can select each by clicking the line to show its residual plot. • Click and hold a dot on the residual plot to see the residual. • The residual plot for the selected regression or function displays in the work area. • For consistency in comparing sets of data, residual plots do not rescale when you move from one function or regression to another. • Select a function or regression before a showing residual plot.
Using the Zoom Data Tool ▶ On the Window/Zoom menu, click Zoom Data . The work area rescales to display all plotted data. Using the Zoom In Tool 1. On the Window/Zoom menu, click Zoom In. 2. In the work area, click the center point of the area of interest. This will be the center of the zoom in action. The plot redraws to focus and enlarge the portion of the plot centered about the point you selected in the previous step. Using the Zoom Out Tool 1. On the Window/Zoom menu, click Zoom Out. 2.
Note: You can edit the function’s expression typed in the entry field. However, the function graphed in Data & Statistics cannot be manipulated or moved around the work area. To do that, use Graphs & Geometry. 3. Type the function in the entry field, and press Enter. Note: You can rename the function by typing over f1(x): with another name, if you choose. The function graphs in the work area and is saved as a variable for use in other applications.
Entering Functions from Other Applications You can enter a function that has been defined as a variable in another application, such as Lists & Spreadsheet, Graphs & Geometry, or Calculator. 1. Add a variable to each axis. You can access any variables defined in a Lists & Spreadsheet or Calculator application in your problem from the variable list. 2. From the Analyze menu, click Plot Function. A function entry field displays in the work area. 3. Click on the toolbar. Handheld: Press h.
Editing a Function You can edit a function and update it in the work area. 1. You can edit a function by double-clicking the equation and then making changes as required. 2. Press Enter after making all changes and the updates are displayed in the work area. Using Data & Statistics Functions in other Applications Data & Statistics functions are stored as variables, and may be used in other applications, in the same manner as any other variable. Support for all function types is included.
2. On the Plot Types menu, click Histogram. Note:Show Normal PDF is available only when histogram is the plot type. 3. From the Analyze menu, click Show Normal PDF. The normal PDF for the graph plots in the work area. The expression used to calculate the PDF displays when selected. You can click Hide Normal PDF on the Analyze menu to remove the PDF.
Using Shade Under Function Use Shade Under Function to find the area of a selected region under a function graphed in the work area. 1. Select any function graphed in the Data & Statistics work area. For example, select a previously graphed normal PDF. 2. From the Analyze menu, click Shade Under Function. The pointer becomes a dotted vertical line and the boundary +/- ˆ displays when you position the mouse near the boundary on the left or right. You can click when ˆ displays to set it as a boundary. 3.
• Use plot value to set the boundary to an exact number. When a boundary for shading is set to a plotted value, you can change the plotted value to update the shading. • Edit a shaded region by clicking and dragging the edge at the starting or ending boundary. Using Graph Trace Graph Trace lets you move from one point on a graph to another to analyze variations in the data. You can use Graph Trace mode to explore the data for the following graphs.
• Apply fill colors to objects, such as shading, or change the color for a variable’s data points. • Apply color to plotted lines (such as lines of regression) or movable lines. Inserting a Background Image When using the computer software, you can insert an image as a background for a Data & Statistics page. The file format of the image can be .bmp, .jpg, or .png. 1. From the Insert menu, click Image. 2. Navigate to the image that you want to insert. 3. Select it, and then click Open.
• Scroll to view additional text in a box by clicking the arrows at the top and bottom edge. • Click outside of the text entry box to exit the Text tool. • Hide text by clicking the Actions menu and clicking Hide Text. • Change the color of text. Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider A slider control lets you interactively adjust or animate the value of a numeric variable. You can insert sliders in the Graphs, Geometry, Notes, and Data & Statistics applications.
2. Enter the desired values, and click OK. The slider is displayed. On a Graphs, Geometry, or Data & Statistics page, handles are displayed to let you move or stretch the slider. To remove the handles and use the slider, click an empty space in the work area. You can show the handles anytime by selecting Move from the slider's context menu. 3. To adjust the variable, slide the pointer (or click the arrows on a minimized slider).
2. Click an option to select it. Automatic Sliders in Graphs Sliders can be created for you automatically in the Graphs application and in the analytic window of the Geometry application. You are offered automatic sliders when you define certain functions, equations, or sequences that refer to undefined variables. Inferential Statistics You can explore hypothesis tests and probability distributions in the Data & Statistics application after entering the data on a Lists & Spreadsheet page.
3. Type the plot parameters into the Normal Cdf wizard. 4. Select the Draw check box to see the distribution plotted and shaded in Data & Statistics. Note: The Draw option is not available for all distributions. 5. Click OK. Exploring Inferential Statistics Plots After drawing the plot in the previous example, you can explore the effect of changing the upper bound. ▶ On the Data & Statistics plot, drag the vertical line that represents the upper bound toward the left or right.
392 Data & Statistics Application
Notes Application The Notes application lets you create and share text documents using the TI-Nspire™ handheld and computer software. Use Notes to: • Create study notes to reinforce learning, demonstrate your understanding of classroom concepts, and to review for exams. • Edit collaboratively by assigning different roles to individuals using your document so that any edits appear in a different text format. • Create and evaluate math expressions.
Using Templates in Notes Use the options on the Templates menu to select a format for your Notes page. Menu Option Function 2: Templates 1: Q&A Creates a template to enter question and answer text. 2: Proof Creates a template to enter statement and reason text. Lets you type freeform text. 3: Default Toggles to show or hide the Answer in a Q&A format. 4:Hide Answer (Q&A) Selecting a Template Complete the following steps to select and apply a template: 1. From the Notes menu, click . 2.
reasons. Press Tab to move the text cursor between the Statements and Reasons areas of the template. Formatting Text in Notes Text formatting lets you apply visual properties, such as bold and italic, to your text. • Ordinary text. Apply most combinations of bold, italic, underline, superscript, subscript, and strikethrough formatting. Select font and font size for any character. • Text in a math expression box. Apply formatting and enter math exponents and math subscripts for variable names.
The changes are applied to the text as you make selections. Note: The toolbar shows only the icons that are applicable to the type of text selected. For example, superscript ( ordinary text. ) and subscript ( ) are shown only for Using Color in Notes When working in the Notes application on a desktop, use the (fill color) or the (text color) options on the Documents Workspace toolbar to emphasize words, calculations, and formulas.
2. From the Documents Workspace toolbar, click the arrow next to . Handheld: Press ~ , and then press Edit > Fill Color. The Fill Color palette opens. 3. Click a color to apply it to the selected text. Inserting Images When working in the Notes application on a desktop, use the Images option on the Insert menu to add an image to a Notes page. Note: The option for inserting an image is not available when working on a handheld.
Menu Name Menu Option 1: Math Box - / M 2: Chem box - / E 2: Shape 3: Comment Function Lets you insert a math expression. Lets you insert a chemical formula or equation. Marks the selected text as an angle, triangle, circle, line, segment, ray, or vector. Lets you type text that is italicized and prefaced with Teacher or Reviewer. Inserting Comments in Notes Text You can insert Teacher or Reviewer comments into a Notes application. Comments are easy to distinguish from the original text. 1.
Inserting Geometric Shape Symbols You can use geometric shape symbols to designate selected text as geometric objects, such as an angle, circle, or line segment. To insert a shape symbol, position the cursor where you want it, and then do the following: • PC: From the Insert menu, click Shapes , and then select the shape to apply. • Handheld: Press b to display the Notes menu. On the Insert menu, click Shapes , and then select the shape to apply.
Menu Name Menu Option Function 2: Show Warning Info Displays a warning indicator after the warning has been dismissed. Displays an error after the error has been dismissed. 3: Show Error Entering an Expression 1. In the Notes work area, position the cursor where you want the expression. 2. From the Insert menu, select Math Box. —or— Press Ctrl + M (Mac®: Press “+ M). An empty math expression box is displayed. 3. Type the expression in the box.
Menu Name Menu Option Function 4: Deactivate Deactivates the current or selected item (box or boxes) 5: Deactivate All Deactivates all boxes in the current Notes application. 6: Activate Activates the current or selected previously deactivated item. 7: Activate All Activates all boxes in the current Notes application.
Breaking Long Calculations Some calculations may take a long time. Notes indicates that the handheld is performing a long calculation by displaying a busy icon. If a calculation is taking more time than you want to spend, you can end the calculation. To stop the function or program in progress, do the following: • Windows®: Hold down the F12 key and press Enter repeatedly. • Mac®: Hold down the F5 key and press Enter repeatedly. • Handheld: Hold down the c key and press · repeatedly.
• The operating system in use (numeric or CAS). • Any restrictions imposed by an active Press-to-Test session. Example of Math Actions in Notes 1. Insert a math box, and type the equation x 2+3x +1=0, but don't press Enter yet. Numeric OS CAS OS 2. Display the context menu of the equation, and select Math Actions . Windows®: Right-click the equation. Mac®: Hold “, and click the equation. Handheld: Point to the equation, and press / b . Numeric OS CAS OS 3.
Numeric OS CAS OS 7. As a further exploration, drag through the math box to select x 2+3·x +1. Do not include the "=0" portion. Numeric OS CAS OS 8. Display the context menu for the selected text, select Math Actions > Find Roots of Polynomial, and press Enter to complete the action. The action and its result are shown in a new math box. Numeric OS CAS OS Tips for Using Math Actions in Notes ▶ For a previously evaluated expression, click in the expression and then display its context menu.
If page layout options allow, the graph appears on the same page as the function or relation. Otherwise, the graph appears on a separate Graphs page. The type of graph created depends on: • The type of function or relation. • Any restrictions imposed by an active Press-to-Test session. Example of Graphing from Notes This example uses a Notes page to explore a quadratic function interactively. 1. Insert a math box on a new Notes page, and enter the following function definition: Define f1(x)=x2-1·x-4 2.
4. Explore the relationship between the defined function and its graph: - Drag the ends or center of the graph to manipulate it, and observe the changes to the function definition. —or— - Edit the defined function in the math box, and observe the changes to the graph. Inserting Chemical Equations in Notes Chemical equation boxes (chem boxes) make it easy to type chemical formulas and equations, such as .
2. From the Insert menu, select Chem Box. —or— Press Ctrl + E (Mac®: Press “+ E ). An empty chemical equation box is displayed. 3. Type the equation in the box. For example, to represent sulphuric acid, type h2sO4, capitalizing the O manually. The chem box automatically formats the text as you type: 4. If you need superscripts for ionic equations, type a caret symbol ( ^) and then the text. 5. Use parentheses to indicate whether a compound is solid (s), liquid (l), gas (g), or aqueous (aq). 6.
Note: You can manually update a deactivated box or boxes by selecting the box or boxes and using the process described in Evaluating and Approximating Math Expressions. Deactivating All Boxes in the Notes Application To deactivate all boxes in the Notes application: ▶ With a document open, place your cursor in the Notes application that you want to deactivate and select Deactivate All. • Windows®: Click Actions > Deactivate All or right-click and click Actions > Deactivate All.
Using Calculations in Notes In the Notes application, the options on the Calculations menu enable you to perform calculations. The calculations are described in the following table. Important Information to Know • Notes does not support editing programs. Use Program Editor instead. • Notes does not support executing Lock or Unlock commands. Use Calculator instead. • Notes does not display intermediate results obtained using the "Disp" command. Use Calculator instead.
Menu Name Menu Option Function (CAS): Calculus Minimum, Function Maximum, Tangent Line, Normal Line, Arc Length, Series, Differential Equation Solver, Implicit Differentiation, and Numerical Calculations 5: Probability Use tools from the Calculator Probability menu, including Factorial, Permutations, Combinations, Random, and Distributions. 6: Statistics Use tools from the Calculator Statistics menu, including Stat Calculations, Stat Results, List Math, List Operations, and others.
3. Type some more text; for example: Real Roots of f1(x) are: 4. In a new math box, type: polyRoots(f1(x),x). 5. Press Enter and hide the input of this math box by using the Math Box attributes dialog box. 6. Use the Page Layout toolbar icon to select the split layout. 7. Add the Graph application and plot f1(x). See how the roots of f1 change when the function is modified in Graph.
Example #2: Using Notes to Explore Data Sampling This example shows how to create a sampling distribution of sample means drawn from a given population. We will be able to watch the sampling distribution take shape for a given sample size and describe its characteristics. You can change the population and the sample size. 1. Set up the population and the sample size. a) Type Create sample data: b) Insert a math expression box and define the population. For example, type population:=seq(n,n,1,50).
d) Deactivate the math expression box using Actions > Deactivate. The deactivation will prevent the content of that math box from being overwritten when the values for num and sampmeans change. The deactivated math box will be shown with the light color background. 3. Set up Data & Statistics for the sampling. a) Change the page layout and insert Data & Statistics. b) Click on the horizontal axis and add sampmeans list. c) Change the window setting: XMins=1 and XMax = 50.
d) Deactivate the math expression box using Actions > Deactivate to prevent the contents of the math box from changing when num and sampmeans values are reinitialized. e) Create math expression boxes that display the current number of experiments ( num), sample ( sample ), and the list of sample means ( sampmeans). 5. Now you are ready to explore. Add more samples by simply pressing Enter when you are in the math expression box in the "Create new samples" section.
You can also change the sample size and restart the sampling.
416
Data Collection The Vernier DataQuest™ application is built into the TI-Nspire™ software and the operating system (OS) for handhelds. The application lets you: • Capture, view, and analyze real-world data using a TI-Nspire™ handheld, a Windows® computer, or a Mac® computer. • Collect data from up to five connected sensors (three analog and two digital) using the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle.
À Vernier DataQuest™ Menu. Contains menu items for setup, collection, and analysis of sensor data. Á Details view. Contains buttons for starting data collection , changing collection settings , marking collected data , storing data sets , and tabs for managing multiple data runs. View selection buttons let you choose from Meter view or Table view . Â , Graph view , Data work area. The information displayed here depends on the view. Meter.
Sending Collected Data to Other TI-Nspire™ Applications You can send collected data to the Graphs, Lists & Spreadsheet, and Data & Statistics applications. ▶ From the Send To menu, click the name of the application. A new page showing the data is added to the current problem. About Collection Devices You can select from a variety of sensors and interfaces to collect data while running the Vernier DataQuest™ application with TI-Nspire™ software.
Sensor Interface Description This sensor interface is used with handhelds. It has a mini-USB connector so it can be plugged directly into the handheld. Connect sensors to Vernier EasyLink® to: Vernier EasyLink® • Measure barometric pressure. • Measure the salinity of a solution. • Investigate the relationship between pressure and volume (Boyles’ Law). This sensor interface is used with computers. It has a standard connector so it can be plugged into a Windows® or Mac® computer.
Sensor Description CBR 2™ • Measure the acceleration of an object. This analog sensor connects directly to TI-Nspire™ handhelds through the mini-USB port and is used to collect temperature ranges. You can design experiments to: • Collect weather data. • Record temperature changes due to chemical reactions. • Perform heat fusion studies. Vernier EasyTemp® temperature sensor Sensors for Computers The following table lists some sensors you can use with a computer.
• 3-Axis Accelerometer • Low-g Accelerometer • CBR 2™ - Connects directly to handheld USB port • Go!Motion® - Connects directly to computer USB port • Extra Long Temperature Probe • Stainless Steel Temperature Probe • Surface Temperature Sensor • Ammonium Ion-Selective Electrode • Anemometer • Barometer • Blood Pressure Sensor • C02 Gas Sensor • Calcium Ion-Selective Electrode • Charge Sensor • Chloride Ion-Selective Electrode • Colorimeter • Conductivity Probe • High Curr
• Melt Station • Microphone • Nitrate Ion-Selective Electrode • O2 Gas Sensor • ORP Sensor • pH Sensor • Relative Humidity Sensor • Respiration Monitor Belt (Requires Gas Pressure Sensor) • Rotary Motion Sensor • Salinity Sensor • Soil Moisture Sensor • Sound Level Meter • Spirometer • Thermocouple • TI-Light - Sold only with the CBL 2™ • TI-Temp - Sold only with the CBL 2™ • TI-Voltage - Sold only with the CBL 2™ • Tris-Compatible Flat pH Sensor • Turbidity Sensor • U
Connecting Directly ▶ Attach the cable on the sensor directly to the computer's USB port or to an appropriate port on the handheld. Connecting through a Sensor Interface 1. Attach the sensor to the sensor interface using either the mini-USB, USB, or BT connector and the appropriate cable. 2. Attach the interface to a computer or handheld using the appropriate connector and cable. Note: To attach a handheld to a TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle, slide the handheld into the connector at the bottom of the Lab Cradle.
2. Select the name of the offline sensor to remove. 3. Click Remove. Modifying Sensor Settings You can modify how the sensor values are displayed and stored. For example, when using a temperature sensor, you can change the unit of measure from Centigrade to Fahrenheit. Changing Sensor Measurement Units Measurement units depend on the selected sensor. For example, units for the Vernier Go!Temp® Temperature sensor are Fahrenheit, Celsius, and Kelvin.
Calibrating a Sensor When the software or handheld detects a sensor, the calibration for that sensor automatically loads. You can calibrate some sensors manually. Other sensors, such as the Colorimeter and the Dissolved Oxygen Sensor, must be calibrated to provide useful data. There are three options for calibrating a sensor: • Manual Entry • Two Point • Single Point Refer to the sensor’s documentation for specific calibration values and procedures.
Collecting Data Collecting Time-Based Data The Time Based collection mode captures sensor data automatically at regular time intervals. 1. Connect the sensor or sensors. Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically. 2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment. This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults. 3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Time Based.
Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically. 2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment. This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults. 3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Selected Events . The Selected Events Setup dialog box opens. - Name. This text is visible in the Meter View. Its first letter is displayed as the independent variable in the Graph view. - Units . This text is displayed in Graph view alongside the Name.
3. From the Experiment menu, select Collection Mode > Events with Entry. The Events with Entry Setup dialog box opens. - Name. This text is visible in the Meter View. Its first letter is displayed as the independent variable in the Graph view. - Units. This text is displayed in Graph view alongside the Name. - Average over 10 s. This option averages ten seconds of data for each point. 4. Modify sensor settings as necessary. 5. Click Start Collection . The Keep Current Reading icon becomes active.
Collecting Photogate Timing Data The Photogate Timing collection mode is available only when using the Vernier Photogate sensor. This sensor can time objects that pass through the gates or objects that pass outside of the gates. 1. Connect the Photogate sensor or sensors. Sensor names are added to the sensor list automatically. 2. From the Experiment menu, select New Experiment. This removes all data and restores all meter settings to their defaults. 3.
Using Data Markers to Annotate Data Data markers give you a way to emphasize specific data points, such as when you change a condition. For example, you might mark a point at which a chemical is added to a solution or when heat is applied or removed. You can add a marker with or without a comment, and you can hide a comment.
3. Complete the items in the dialog box. Adding a Comment to an Existing Marker 1. In the Detail view, click to expand the list of markers for the data set. 2. Click the entry for the marker that you want to change, and complete the items in the dialog box. Repositioning a Data Marker 1. Click to expand the list of markers in the Detail view.
2. Click the entry for the marker that you want to change. 3. In the dialog box, type a new value for Mark Value at. Moving a Data Marker's Comment in the Graph View ▶ Drag the comment to move it. The connecting line remains attached to the data point. Hiding/Showing a Data Marker's Comment ▶ Hide a comment by clicking the X at the end of the comment. ▶ To restore a hidden comment: a) Click to expand the list of markers in the Detail view.
• When a delay countdown expires on a unit that supports a delayed start Setting Up for Remote Collection 1. Save and close any open documents, and start with a new document. 2. Connect the remote collection unit to the computer or handheld. 3. Modifying Sensor Settings. 4. Click the Collection Setup button . 5. On the Collection Setup screen, check Enable Remote Collection. 6. Select the remote collection unit from the Devices list. 7.
9. Disconnect the unit. Depending on the device, LED lights may indicate its status. Red. The system is not ready. Amber. The system is ready but not collecting data. Green. The system is collecting data. 10. If you are starting collection manually, press the trigger when ready. If you are starting based on a delay, the collection will start automatically when the countdown is complete. Retrieving the Remote Data After collecting data remotely, you transfer it to the computer or handheld for analysis. 1.
1. Connect the sensor. 2. Click Experiment > Advanced Set up > Triggering > Set Up. The Configure Trigger dialog box opens. 3. Select the sensor from the Select the sensor to use as trigger drop-down list. Note: The menu displays the sensors connected to the TI-Nspire™ Lab Cradle. 4. Select one of the following from the Select the type of trigger to use drop-down list. • • Increasing through threshold. Use to trigger on increasing values. Decreasing through threshold. Use to trigger on decreasing values.
Important: When the trigger is enabled, it stays active until it is disabled or you start a new experiment. Enabling a Disabled Trigger If you set the trigger values in the current experiment, and then disable them, you can enable the triggers again. To enable a trigger: ▶ Click Experiment > Advanced Set Up > Triggering > Enable. Disabling an Enabled Trigger To disable the active trigger. ▶ Click Experiment > Advanced Set Up > Triggering > Disable.
Comparing Data Sets 1. Click the Graph View icon to show the graph. 2. Click the Data Set Selector (near the top of the Detail View) to expand the list of data sets. À Data Set Selector lets you expand or collapse the list. Á Expanded list shows available data sets. Scroll buttons appear as necessary to let you scroll the list. 3. Choose which data sets to view by selecting or clearing the check boxes. The graph is rescaled as necessary to show all selected data.
Tip: To quickly select a single data set, hold down Shift while clicking its name in the list. The graph shows only the selected set, and the list is collapsed automatically to help you view details of the data. Renaming a Data Set By default, data sets are named run1, run2, and so on. The name of each data set is displayed in the Table view. 1. Click the Table View icon to show the table. 2. Display the context menu for the table view, and select Data Set Options > [current name ]. 3.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message. Expanding the View Details Area ▶ Drag the boundary at the right edge of the Details area to increase or decrease its width. Using Sensor Data in ProgramsI You can access sensor data from all connected sensor probes through your TI-Basic program by using this command: RefreshProbeVars statusVar • You must first launch the Vernier DataQuest™ application, or you will receive an error.
StatusVar Value statusVar =3 Status The Vernier DataQuest™ application is launched, but you have not connected any probes. • Your TI-Basic program will read directly from Vernier DataQuest™ variables in the symbol table. • The meter.time variable shows the last value of the variable; it does not update automatically. If no data collection has occurred, meter.time will be 0 (zero).
If status=0 Then Disp "ready" For n,1,50 RefreshProbeVars status temperature:=meter.temperature Disp "Temperature: ",temperature If temperature>30 Then Disp "Too hot" © Play a tone on the Hub Send "SET SOUND 440 TIME 2" EndIf © Wait for 1 second between samples Wait 1 EndFor Else Disp "Not ready. Try again later" EndIf EndPrgm Analyzing Collected Data In the Vernier DataQuest™ application, use Graph View to analyze data.
1. Click Analyze > Tangent. A check mark appears in the menu next to the option. 2. Click the graph. The examine indicator is drawn to the nearest data point. The values of the plotted data are shown in the View details area and the All Details for Graph dialog box. You can move the examine line by dragging, clicking another point, or using the arrow keys.
3. Select the plotted column name if you have more than a single column. For example, run1.Pressure. The Stats dialog box opens. 4. Review the data. 5. Click OK. For information on clearing the Statistics analysis, see Removing Analysis Options. Generating a Curve Fit Use Curve Fit to find the best curve fit to match the data. Select all of the data or a selected region of data. The curve is drawn on the graph. 1.
Curve Fit option Calculated in the form: Power (ax^b) y = a*x^b Exponential (ab^x) y = a*b^x Logarithmic y = a + b*ln(x) Sinusoidal y = a*sin(b*x + c) + d Logistic (d 0) y = c/(1 + a*e^(-bx)) + d Natural Exponential y = a*e^(-c*x) Proportional y = a*x The Fit Linear dialog box opens. 4. Click OK. 5. Review the data. For information on clearing the Curve Fit analysis, see Removing Analysis Options.
For example, if you set m1=1 as the spin increment, when you click the up spin button the value changes to 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and so on. If you click the down spin button, the value changes to 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, and so on. 1. Click Analyze > Model. The Model dialog box opens. 2. Type your own function. —or— Click to select a value from the drop-down list. 3. Click OK. The Set Coefficient Values dialog box opens.
4. Type the value for the variables. 5. Type the change in value in the Spin Increment fields. 6. Click OK. Note: These values are the initial values. You can also adjust these values in the View Details area. The model is shown on the graph with adjustment options in the View Details area and in the All Details for Graph dialog box. 7. (Optional) Adjust the window setting for minimum and maximum axis values. For more information, see Setting the Axis for One Graph.
The display you selected is removed from the graph and the View Details area. Displaying Collected Data in Graph View When you collect data, it is written in both the Graph and Table views. Use the Graph view to examine the plotted data. Important: The Graph menu and Analyze menu items are only active when working in Graph View. Selecting the Graph View ▶ Click the Graph View tab .
Graph1 and Graph 2 are displayed. Displaying Graphs in the Page Layout View Use the Page layout view when Show Graph is not the appropriate solution for showing more than one graph. The Show Graph option is not applicable for: • Multiple runs using a single sensor. • Two or more of the same sensors. • Multiple sensors that use the same column(s) of data. To use Page Layout: 1. Open the original data set you want to see in two graph windows. 2. Click Edit > Page Layout > Select Layout. 3.
Defining Column Options You can name columns and define the decimal points and the precision you want to use. 1. from the Data menu, select Column Options . Note: You can be in the Meter, Graph, or Table view and still click these menu options. The results will still be visible. 2. Click the name of the column you want to define. The Column Options dialog box opens. 3. Type the long name for the column in the Name field. 4. Type the abbreviated name in the Short Name field.
Important: Heart rate and blood pressure sensors require a tremendous amount of data to be useful, and the default for these sensors is to be unlinked to improve system performance. 8. Select Apply changes to all Data Sets to apply these settings to all data sets. 9. Click OK. The column settings are now defined with the new values. Creating a Column of Manually Entered Values To enter data manually, add a new column. Sensor columns cannot be modified, but data entered manually can be edited. 1.
6. (Optional) Select Apply changes to all Data Sets to apply these settings to all data sets. 7. (Optional) Select Generate Values to automatically populate the rows. If you select this option, complete these steps: a) Type a starting value in the Start field. b) Type an ending value in the End field. c) Type the increase in value in the Increment field. The number of points is calculated and shown in the Number of Points field. 8. Select Link from list to link to data in another TI-Nspire™ application.
2. Type the long name for the column in the Name field. 3. Type the abbreviated name in the Short Name field. Note: This name is displayed if the column cannot expand to display the full name. 4. Type the units to be used. 5. From the Displayed Precision drop-down list, select the precision value. Note: The default precision is related to the precision of the sensor. 6. Type a calculation including one of the column names in the Expression field.
Customizing the Graph of Collected Data You can customize the Graph view by adding a title, changing colors, and setting ranges for the axis. Adding a Title When you add a title to a graph, the title is displayed in the View Details area. When you print the graph, the title prints on the graph. 1. Click Graph > Graph Title. The Graph Title dialog box opens. If there are two graphs in the work area, the dialog box has two title options. 2. Type the name of the graph in the Title field.
The title is shown. Setting Axis Ranges Setting Axis Ranges for One Graph To modify the minimum and maximum range for the x and y axis: 1. Click Graph > Window Settings . The Window Settings dialog box opens. 2. Type the new values in one or more of these fields: - X Min - X Max - Y Min - Y Max 3. Click OK. The application uses the new values for the graph visual range until you modify the range or change data sets.
2. Type the new values in one or more of these fields: - X Min - X Max - Graph 1: Y Min - Y Max - Graph 2: Y Min - Y Max 3. Click OK. The application uses the new values for the graph visual range until you modify the range or change data sets. Setting the Axis Range on the Graph Screen You can modify the minimum and maximum range for the x and y axes directly on the graph screen. ▶ Select the axis value that you want to change, and type a new value. The graph is redrawn to reflect the change.
2. The Detail view shows a list of available data sets. 3. Use the check boxes to select the data sets to plot. Autoscaling a Graph Use the autoscale option to show all the points plotted. Autoscale Now is useful after you change the x and y axis range or zoom in or out of a graph. You can also define the automatic autoscale setting to use during and after a collection. Autoscale Now Using the Application Menu ▶ Click Graph > Autoscale Now. The graph now displays all the points plotted.
Defining Autoscale During a Collection There are two options for using the automatic autoscaling that occurs during a collection. To choose an option: 1. Click Options > Autoscale Settings . The Autoscale Settings dialog box opens. 2. Click ► to open the During Collection drop-down list. 3. Select one of these options: • Autoscale Larger - Expands the graph as needed to show all points as you collect them. • Do Not Autoscale - The graph is not changed during a collection. 4.
4. Click OK to save the setting. Selecting a Range of Data Selecting a range of data on the graph is useful in several situations, such as when zooming in or out, striking and unstriking data, and examining settings. To select a range: 1. Drag across the graph. The selected area is indicated by gray shading. 2. Perform one of these actions.
If a Zoom In precedes a Zoom Out, the graph displays the original settings prior to the Zoom In. For example, if you Zoomed In twice, the first Zoom Out would display the window of the first Zoom In. To display the full graph with all data points from multiple zoom ins, use Autoscale Now. Setting Point Options To indicate how often marks show on the graph and whether to use a connecting line: 1. Click Options > Point Options . The Point Options dialog box opens. 2.
Changing a Graph's Color 1. Click the point indicator for the graph whose color you want to change. 2. In the Column Options dialog box, select the new Color. Selecting Point Markers 1. Right-click in the graph to open the menu. 2. Click Point Marker. Note: If there is only one dependent variable column, the Point Marker option is preceded by the data set name and column name. Otherwise, the Point Marker option has a menu. 3. Select the column variable to change. 4. Select the point marker to set.
Selecting an Independent Variable Column Use the option Select X-axis Column to select the column used as the independent variable when graphing the data. This column is used for all graphs. 1. Click Graph > Select X-axis Column. 2. Select the variable you want to change. The x-axis label on the graph changes and the graph is reordered using the new independent variable for graphing the data.
Striking and Restoring Data Striking data omits it temporarily from the Graph view and from the analysis tools. 1. Open the data run that contains the data to be struck. 2. Click Table View . 3. Select the region by dragging from the starting row to the ending point. The screen scrolls so you can see the selection. 4. Click Data > Strike Data. 5. Select one of the following: • • In Selected Region. Strike the data from the area you selected. Outside Selected Region.
If you have multiple data sets, and want a different data set or base column than the default, you can select the data set to replay and the base column. To select the data set to replay: 1. Click Experiment > Replay > Advanced Settings . The Advanced Replay Settings dialog box opens. 2. Select the data set to replay from the Data Set drop-down list. Note: Changing the run in the Data Set selection tool does not affect the playback choice.
Adjusting the Playback Rate To adjust the playback rate: 1. Select Experiment > Replay > Playback Rate. The Playback Rate dialog box opens. 2. In the Playback Rate field, click ▼ to open the drop-down list. 3. Select the rate at which the playback will play. Normal speed is 1.00. A higher value is faster, and a lower value is slower. 4. Select one of the following options: • Click Start to start the playback and save the settings. • Click OK to save the settings for use on the next playback.
To determine the numerical 2nd derivative of List B with respect to List A, enter the following express: derivative(B,A,2,0) or derivative (B,A,2,1) The last parameter is either 0 or 1 depending on the method you are using. When it is 0, a weighted average is used. When it is 1, a time shifted derivative method is used. Note: The first derivative calculation (weighted average) is what the Tangent tool uses to display the slope at a data point when examining data. (Analyze > Tangent).
Using Motion Match Use this option to create a randomly generated plot when creating position-versus-time or velocity-versus-time graphs. This feature is only available when using a motion detector such as the CBR 2™ sensor or the Go!Motion® sensor. Generating a Motion Match Plot To generate a plot: 1. Attach the motion detector. 2. Click View > Graph. 3. Click Analyze > Motion Match. 4. Select one of the following options: • • New Position Match. Generates a random position plot. New Velocity Match.
2. Select Print All from the Print what drop-down list. 3. Select additional options, if needed. 4. Click Print to send the document to the printer. Setting Options for the Print All Feature 1. Click Options > Print All Settings . The Print All Settings dialog box opens. 2. Select the views you want to print. • Print Current View. The current view is sent to the printer. • Print All Views. All three views (Meter, Graph, and Table) are sent to the printer. • 468 More.
3. Click OK. The Print All Settings are now complete and can be used when printing.
470
Widgets All work that you create and save using TI-Nspire™ applications is stored as a document, which you can share with others using TI-Nspire™ software, a TI-Nspire™ handheld, or the TI-Nspire™ App for iPad®. You save these TI-Nspire™ documents as .tns files. A Widget is a .tns document that is stored in your MyWidgets folder. You can use Widgets to: • Easily access text files • Insert and run scripts (such as the pre-loaded widget example: Stopwatch.
2. Click Add Widget. 3. Scroll to select a .tns file from the box. 4. Click Add. Note: Stopwatch is a preloaded .tns file. Any saved .tns file will show up in this list.
Adding a Widget to an Existing Document 1. Click the ¤ on Doc¤ > Insert > Widget. 2. Click Add. Note: You can also add a Widget to a new or existing document using the Insert menu.
Saving a Widget 1. Click . 2. Navigate to MyDocuments > MyWidgets. 3. Type in a name for your Widget. 4. Click Save.
Libraries A library is a TI-Nspire™ document that contains a collection of variables, functions, and/or programs that have been defined as library objects. Unlike ordinary variables, functions, and programs, which can be used only within a single problem (the problem in which they are defined), library objects are accessible from any document. You can even create public library objects that appear in the TI-Nspire™ Catalog.
If the folder has been inadvertently deleted, you must create it before attempting to use libraries. You can define library objects using either the Program Editor or the Calculator application. Library objects must be defined with a Define command and must reside in the first problem of a library document. Note: If you use the Program Editor to define a library function or program, you must store the object and also save the document. Saving the document does not automatically store the object.
Using Short and Long Names Anytime you are in the same problem where an object is defined, you can access it by entering its short name (the name given in the object’s Define command). This is the case for all defined objects, including private, public, and non-library objects. You can access a library object from any document by typing the object’s long name. A long name consists of the name of the object’s library document followed by a backslash “\” followed by the name of the object.
2. Open the TI-Nspire™ application in which you want to use the variable, function, or program. Note: All applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and Notes applications can run programs. 3. Type the name of the object, such as lib1\func1(). In case of a function or program, always follow the name with parentheses. To type the “\” character on the handheld, press g p. 4. If arguments are required, type them inside the parentheses.
Restoring an Included Library If you inadvertently delete or overwrite an included library, you can restore it from the installation DVD. 1. Open the DVD, and navigate to the libs folder. 2. Identify the library file to restore, such as linalg.tns or linalgCAS.tns for the linear algebra library. 3. Copy the file. - Windows®: Copy the file to your designated library folder. The default location is My Documents\TI-Nspire\MyLib. Mac®: Copy the file to your designated library folder.
480
Getting Started with the Program Editor You can create user-defined functions or programs by typing definition statements on the Calculator entry line or by using the Program Editor. The Program Editor offers some advantages, and it is covered in this section. For more information, see Calculator. • The editor has programming templates and dialog boxes to help you define functions and programs using correct syntax.
Defining a Program or Function Starting a new Program Editor 1. Make sure you are in the document and problem in which you want to create the program or function. 2. Click Insert button on the application toolbar, and select Program Editor > New. (On the handheld, press ~ and select Insert > Program Editor > New.) 3. Type a name for the function or program you are defining. 4. Select the Type ( Program or Function). 5.
2. Between the Func and EndFunc (or Prgm and EndPrgm) lines, type the lines of statements that make up your function or program. - You can either type the names of functions and commands or insert them from the Catalog. A line can be longer than the width of the screen; if so, you might have to scroll to view the entire statement. After typing each line, press Enter. This inserts a new blank line and lets you continue entering another line.
3. Type the text of the comment after the © symbol. Checking Syntax The Program Editor lets you check the function or program for correct syntax. ▶ From the Check Syntax & Store menu, click Check Syntax. If the syntax checker finds any syntax errors, it displays an error message and tries to position the cursor near the first error so you can correct it. Storing the Function or Program You must store your function or program to make it accessible.
2. If the function or program is a library object, select its library from the Location list. 3. Select the function or program name from the Name list. The function or program is displayed in a viewer. 4. Use the arrow keys to view the function or program. 5. If you want to edit the program, click Edit. Handheld: Press e to highlight Edit, and then press ·. Note: The Edit selection is available only for functions and programs defined in the current problem.
2. Select the Library Name. 3. Select the Name of the object. 4. If you want the imported object to have a different name, type the name under Import As . Creating a Copy of a Function or Program When creating a new function or program, you might find it easier to start with a copy of the current one. The copy that you create is not locked, even if the original is locked. 1. From the Actions menu, click Create Copy. 2. Type a new name, or click OK to accept the proposed name. 3.
Changing the Library Access Level 1. From the Actions menu, click Change Library Access . 2. Select the Library Access : - To use the function or program only from the current Calculator problem, select None. To make function or program accessible from any document but not visible in the Catalog, select LibPriv. To make the function or program accessible from any document and also visible in the Catalog, select LibPub. Finding Text 1. From the Actions menu, click Find. 2.
3. Type the replacement text. 4. Click Replace to replace the first occurrence after the cursor position. —or— Click Replace All to replace every occurrence. Note: If the text is found in a math template, a message is displayed to warn you that your replacement text will replace the whole template—not just the found text. Closing the Current Function or Program ▶ From the Actions menu, click Close. If the function or program has unstored changes, you are prompted to check syntax and store before closing.
This will automatically: • • check the syntax and store the program or function, paste the program or function name on the first available line of the Calculator application immediately following the Program Editor. If no Calculator exists in that position, a new one is inserted. 3. If the program or function requires you to supply one or more arguments, type the values or variable names inside the parentheses. 4. Press ·.
Note: All applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and Notes applications can run programs. 3. Open the Catalog and use the library tab to find and insert the object. —or— Type the name of the object. In the case of a program or function, always follow the name with parentheses. libs2\func1() 4. If the program or function requires you to supply one or more arguments, type the values or variable names inside the parentheses. libs2\func1(34,power) 5. Press ·.
- Handheld: Hold down the c key and press · repeatedly. A message is displayed. To edit the program or function in the Program Editor, select Go To. The cursor appears at the command where the break occurred. Getting Values into a Program You can choose from several methods to supply the values that a function or program uses in calculations. Embedding the Values Within the Program or Function This method is useful primarily for values that must be the same each time the program or function is used. 1.
1. Define the volcyl program. Definevolcyl(height,radius) = Prgm Disp "Volume =", approx(p ¦ radius2 ¦ height) EndPrgm 2. Run the program to display the volume of a cylinder with a height of 34 mm and a radius of 5 mm. volcyl(34,5) Volume = 534.071 Note: You do not have to use the parameter names when you run the volcyl program, but you must supply two arguments (as values, variables, or expressions). The first must represent the height, and the second must represent the radius.
© x:=12•6 cos(π/4) © Displaying Information in the History You can use the Disp command in a program or function to display information, including intermediate results, in the history. © Disp 12•6 Disp "Result:",cos(π/4) © Displaying Information in a Dialog Box You can use the Text command to pause a running program and display information in a dialog box. The user clicks OK to continue or clicks Cancel to stop the program. You cannot use the Text command in a function.
Note: When possible, declare as local any variable that is used only within the program and does not need to be available after the program stops. What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message? An Undefined variable error message is displayed when you evaluate a user-defined function or run a user-defined program that references a local variable that is not initialized (assigned a value).
Differences Between Functions and Programs A function defined in the Program Editor is similar to the functions built into the TI-Nspire™ Software. • Functions must return a result, which can be graphed or entered in a table. Programs do not return a result. • You can use a function (but not a program) within an expression. For example: 3 ¦ func1(3) is valid, but not 3 ¦ prog1(3) . • You can run programs from Calculator and Notes applications only.
An internal subroutine is called and executed in the same way as a separate program. Define subtest1()= Prgm local subtest2 À Define subtest2(x,y)= Á Prgm Disp x,y EndPrgm ©Beginning of main program For i,1,4,1 subtest2(i,I*1000) Â EndFor EndPrgm À Á Â Declares the subroutine as a local variable. Defines the subroutine. Calls the subroutine. Note: Use the Program Editor’s Var menu to enter the Define and Prgm...EndPrgm commands.
À Causes a Circular definition error message if x or i does not have a value. The error does not occur if x or i has already been assigned a value. Controlling the Flow of a Function or Program When you run a program or evaluate a function, the program lines are executed in sequential order. However, some commands alter the program flow. For example: • Control structures such as If...EndIf commands use a conditional test to decide which part of a program to execute. • Loop commands such as For...
Á Displays the value of: 2x if x>5 x if x{ 5 Note: EndIf marks the end of the Then block that is executed if the condition is true. If...Then...Else...EndIf Structures To execute one group of commands if a conditional test is true and a different group if the condition is false, use this structure: If x>5 Then Disp "x is greater than 5" À 2¦x& x À Else Disp "x is less than or equal to 5" Á 5¦x& x Á EndIf Disp x  À Á  Executed only if x>5. Executed only if x{ 5.
Goto labelName specifies which Lbl command to branch to Because a Goto command is unconditional (it always branches to the specified label), it is often used with an If command so that you can specify a conditional test. For example: If x>5 Goto GT5 À Disp x --------------- Á Lbl GT5 Disp "The number was > 5" À Á If x>5, branches directly to label GT5. For this example, the program must include commands (such as Stop) that prevent Lbl GT5 from being executed if x{ 5.
At each iteration of the For loop, the variable value is compared to the end value. If variable does not exceed end, the commands within the For...EndFor loop are executed and the loop repeats; otherwise, control jumps to the command following EndFor. Note: The For command automatically increments the counter variable so that the function or program can exit the loop after a certain number of repetitions.
Note: The While command does not automatically change the condition. You must include commands that allow the function or program to exit the loop. At the end of the loop ( EndWhile), control jumps back to the While command, where condition is re-evaluated. To execute the loop the first time, the condition must initially be true. • Any variables referenced in the condition must be set before the While command.
If x>5 À Exit EndLoop Disp x À Á Á An If command checks the condition. Exits the loop and jumps to here when x increments to 6. Note: The Exit command exits from the current loop. In this example, the If command can be anywhere in the loop. When the If command is: The loop is: At the beginning of the loop Executed only if the condition is true. At the end of the loop Executed at least once and repeated only if the condition is true.
Note: Mode changes made within a function or program definition do not persist outside the function or program. Setting a Mode 1. Position the cursor where you want to insert the setMode function. 2. From the Mode menu, click the mode to change, and click the new setting. The correct syntax is inserted at the cursor location. For example: setMode(1,3) Debugging Programs and Handling Errors After you write a function or program, you can use several techniques to find and correct errors.
Command Description PassErr Passes an error to the next level of the Try...EndTry block.
Using the TI-SmartView™ Emulator With three layout options to choose from, teachers will find that the emulator facilitates classroom presentations. In the teacher software, layout options are: • Handheld only • Keypad plus side screen • Handheld plus side screen In the student software, the TI-SmartView™ emulates the keypad, which along with the handheld view, gives students the ability to drive the software as if using a handheld.
3. Click View > Handheld. —or— Click in the status bar to switch to handheld mode. Choosing a Keypad An open document is not affected by changing the keypad. You can switch between keypads anytime you want. To select a keypad: 1. In the emulator panel, click to open the menu and select one of the following options: • • • TI-Nspire™ CX TI-Nspire™ with Touchpad TI-Nspire™ with Clickpad 2.
1. In the emulator panel, click —or— Click File > Settings > TI-SmartView™. . 2. Select one of the following options: • Handheld Only. Displays the emulated handheld and hides the workspace and other panels. Note: To keep the Handheld Only display in front of other application windows, click Always in Front at the top right of the TI-SmartView™ panel. • Keypad + SideScreen. Opens a larger view of the keypad along with the side screen. • Handheld + SideScreen.
As you click keys on the emulator or press keys on the keyboard that activate keys on the emulator, those keys change color, making it easy for your audience to follow along. The last key selected stays highlighted. In the teacher software, the emulator screen and the side screen are both interactive. You can click on icons and menu items on both screens. You can also right-click to display menus on both screens. All handheld shortcuts and arrow functionality work from the computer keyboard.
• Clicking the ¡, ¢, £, or ¤ keys on the Clickpad moves through menus one item at a time. • Clicking and holding down an arrow on the Clickpad causes continual movement in the selected direction. • Clicking the middle of the Clickpad selects the highlighted menu option. Using Settings and Status When working with the TI-SmartView™ emulator, you can change General Settings and Document Settings. For more information, see Using the Documents Workspace.
In the student software, click File > Settings > Keypad Options . The Keypad Options dialog box opens. 2. Click Browse to change the folder where documents are saved and accessed in the My Documents folder when using the emulator. Important: If you change the TI-SmartView™ location, you must also copy or move the MyLib folder and paste it to the new location to see library objects. The default location of MyLib is: • • Windows®: Documents\TI-Nspire\MyLib. Mac®: Documents/TI-Nspire/MyLib.
Working with Documents You can open multiple documents in the workspace by selecting File > Open Document from the menu or using keyboard shortcuts. When you switch between these documents, the emulated handheld shows only the current document. You can insert pages and problems using either the TI-Nspire™ menus or icons, keyboard shortcuts, or TI-SmartView™ menus or shortcuts. Note: You cannot work with PublishView™ documents using the TI-SmartView™ emulator.
512
Writing Lua Scripts The Script Editor allows you to create and deliver dynamically linked simulations, powerful and flexible utilities, and other educational content for exploring math and science concepts. When you open a document containing a script, the script runs automatically as programmed. To see the running script application, the page containing the script application must be active.
Menu bar. Contains options for working with the Script Editor. Toolbar. Provides tools for common Script Editor functions. See Using the Toolbar . Script title. Shows script title. Right-click the title to change it or by clicking Edit > Set Script Title. Text box. Provides a space to type script text. Tools panel. Shows script data. See Using the Tools Panel. Status bar. Displays the operational state of the script. See Using the Status Bar.
Tool name Tool function Focus Script Sets the focus to the page in the document where the script application is attached: • In a TI-Nspire™ document, sets the focus to the page. • In a PublishView™ document, sets the focus to the frame on the page. Step Into While debugging, executes the current statement. If the statement calls any functions, the debugger stops at the first line of each function. Step Over While debugging, executes the current statement.
Using the Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the window shows basic script data, as described in this example: stopwatch, 1.1, 4:1, Running • Name of the document that the script application is attached to ( stopwatch) • Problem and page number ( 1.1) • Script line and character, ( 4:1 describing line 4 and character 1) • Operational state of the script ( Running).
Menu Method 1. Click in the area of the text to zoom. 2. On the View menu, select Zoom, and then select Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Restore. Note that the menu also displays keyboard shortcuts for the Zoom commands. Mouse Method 1. Postion the mouse pointer over the area to zoom. 2. Hold Ctrl, and roll the mouse wheel forward or back. Editing Scripts To edit an existing script, follow these steps. 1. Open the TI-Nspire™ or PublishView™ document that contains the script.
▶ To clear the scripting data in the Tools panel and restore the editor defaults, click View > Restore Editor to Defaults . ▶ To view the script title in the document and before each print statement in the Console, click View > Title in Document View. ▶ To hide or show toolbar labels, click View > Toolbar Text Labels . ▶ To show or hide the Tools panel or its areas, click View > Tools Panel and click the appropriate option.
Managing Images To insert an image into a script application, follow these steps. Add an Image to Resources 1. Click the Resource tab. 2. Click the button. 3. Click on an image file name. 4. Click Open. 5. Accept the default image name or rename the image by typing a new name into the box. (Ex: newimage) 6. Click OK. Note: You will see the image thumbnail in the bottom-right corner of your screen. Your image file name will appear in a list of images at the bottom-left of your screen. 7.
Note:Replace img_1 (above) with the name of your image. 2. Click Set Script to save the script. You will see your image in the Document Preview screen. 3. Click Focus Script to set the focus to the page in the document where you want to attach the script application. Note: A TI-Nspire document sets the focus to the page; A PublishView™ document sets the focus to the frame on the page. Create a Script to Call Up Multiple Images 1.
• To edit the script, enter the password and click OK. • To view the script only, do not enter the password and click View. Debugging Scripts You can debug your script to investigate runtime errors and trace the execution flow. While debugging, data is displayed in the Tools panel. ▶ To enable debugging mode or disable it and return to normal mode, click Debug > Enable Breakpoints or Disable Breakpoints. Note: Disabling breakpoints always resumes the script execution.
522
Using the Help Menu Use the Help menu to find useful information to help you use the software more productively. You can: • Open the PDF help file (press F1 or click Help). • Open the web-based help file (press F2 or click Online Help). • Activate your software license. • Register your TI product. • Explore TI resources such as Activities Exchange, where you can find lessons, quizzes, and other instructive activities shared by educators. • Explore online troubleshooting.
The Activate your software dialog box opens. 6. Type the license number. 7. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog box opens. 8. In the Country field, select your country from the drop-down list if it is different from the default entry. 9. Review the license agreement, and then select to accept the agreement. 10. Click Activate. The license number is validated against the TI database to ensure it is valid. If the license number is valid, the Successful Activation dialog box opens.
11. Click Next to continue, or select Finish to complete the installation with default settings. 12. When prompted, click OK to accept the default location for your TI-Nspire™ folder. If needed, navigate to the location on your computer where you want to store your TI-Nspire™ documents and files. 13. Select whether or not to replace any documents that have the same name. The software launches and the Welcome Screen opens. Registering Your Product 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to the Internet.
▶ Select Help > Visit Activities Exchange to access the Texas Instruments Activities Exchange, site, a forum where you can browse by subject to find ready-to-use math and science learning activities appropriate for middle grades through college. Note: Activities available for download may vary depending on your geographical region.
2. In the Documents Toolbox, click the Content Explorer tab handhelds. to show connected 3. Select the handheld that you are updating. 4. From the Help menu, select Check for OS Updates . • If the operating system is current, a confirmation message appears. • If the operating system is not current, the TI-Nspire™ software prompts you to install the latest OS now. If the updated OS file is not already available on your computer, you can choose a location for it. 5.
2. Click OK to close the window. Helping Improve the Product This product includes a feature that can help TI improve the product by automatically collecting anonymous information about product usage and reliability. Note: Depending on how your software was installed, you might see a product improvement screen the first time you start the software. You also can access the feature manually. 1. From the Help menu, select Product Improvements . 2.
General Information Texas Instruments Support and Service General Information: North and South America Home Page: KnowledgeBase and e-mail inquiries: education.ti.com education.ti.com/support Phone: (800) TI-CARES / (800) 842-2737 For North and South America and U.S. Territories International contact information: education.ti.com/support/worldwide For Technical Support Knowledge Base and support by e-mail: education.ti.com/support or ti-cares@ti.
530
TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® Guidebook This guidebook applies to TI-Nspire™ software version 4.5. To obtain the latest version of the documentation, go to education.ti.com/go/download.
Important Information Except as otherwise expressly stated in the License that accompanies a program, Texas Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied, including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely on an "as-is" basis.
Contents Important Information What's New What's New in Version 4.
Deleting Photos Capturing Screens 27 27 Calculator Application 28 What You Must Know Adding a Calculator Page Entering Simple Math Expressions Inserting Symbols, Functions, Commands, and Templates Using Wizards Using an Expression Template Using the Unit Conversion Assistant Conversion Categories Variables Overview Defining Variables Naming Variables and Functions Creating Variables in Calculator Creating Variables in Graphs Creating a Variable from a Geometry Value Creating Variables in Lists & Spread
Bounded Area (Area Between Curves) Displaying the Equation of a Geometric Object Using the Calculate Tool Creating Shapes Using Gestures (MathDraw) Sticky Tool in Geometry and Graphing 3D Graphing Selecting the 3D Graphing View Graphing 3D Functions Graphing 3D Parametric Equations Zooming and Rotating the 3D View Editing a 3D Graph Changing the Appearance of a 3D Graph Showing and Hiding 3D Graphs Customizing the 3D Viewing Environment Geometry Application What You Must Know Adding a Geometry Page Introd
Adding Color to Plots and Charts Notes Application What You Must Know Inserting Comments, Shapes, and Calculations Working with Math Boxes Inserting Chemical Equations Using Math Actions Graphing from Notes and Calculator Using a Displayed QR Code® Question Documents Overview What You Must Know Responding to Questions Showing Your Work, Checking Answers, and Clearing Answers Submitting Responses Widgets Creating a Widget Adding a Widget to a Document Saving a Widget Libraries Overview What You Must Know
General Information Texas Instruments Support and Service Service and Warranty Information Index 172 172 172 174 vii
What's New What's New in Version 4.5 Unit Conversions • Unit conversions are now available. • A Unit Conversion Assistant has been added that allows the user to automatically generate unit conversion statements without having to type each unit. Constants and Values • Scientific constants are now available. • New scientific constants have been added. • Values for scientific constants have been updated.
Getting Started The TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® enables you to use the TI-Nspire™ Student Software or TI-Nspire™ CAS Student Software on an iPad®.
Note: TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® supports only TI-Nspire™ documents. To return to the TI-Nspire™ Home screen from any other screen within the application, tap Home . About Folders The default Math and Science folders and any folder you create are yellow. You can: • Change folder names • Add documents to these folders or delete documents from these folders • Delete the folders Folders that have been synchronized with Dropbox are blue. Once a folder is synchronized with drop box, you cannot delete it.
• Privacy Policy. Open the Texas Instruments Online Privacy Policy. 3. Tap Done to return to the TI-Nspire™ Home screen. Managing Folders In the TI-Nspire™ App for iPad®, management of folders is completed on the Home screen. Opening Folders ▶ Tap the folder icon to open a folder. • When you open a folder, all documents within the folder are displayed. • Tap a document icon to open a document within the folder. • Tap the folder to close the folder without opening any of the documents.
Note: Folders can contain documents, but cannot contain sub-folders. Creating a Folder with Existing Documents You can also create a new folder by dragging one document onto another document. 1. Tap Edit. 2. Drag one document onto another document to create a new folder that contains both documents. 3. Tap Done. 4. Rename the folder if needed. Renaming Folders 1. Tap the default name under the folder. The keyboard opens. 2. Type a new name, and then tap return.
Opening a Document ▶ Tap the document icon. The document opens to the last problem and page you were working on. Adding New Documents 1. Tap New. 2. Tap an application name. A new document opens with the selected application as the first page. The new document is assigned a default name. Renaming Documents 1. Tap the default name under the document to open the keyboard. 2. Type a new name, and then tap return. The new name is displayed and the keyboard closes.
Moving Documents to an Existing Folder 1. Tap Edit. 2. Drag the document on top of the folder. 3. Tap Done. Deleting Documents Before you delete a document, remember that the document may contain several problems and pages. You may want to verify all the contents before you delete the document. 1. Tap Edit. 2. Tap on the document you want to delete. 3. When the Alert message is displayed: • Tap Delete to delete the document. • Tap Cancel to cancel the delete. 4. Tap Done.
Using TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® Keyboards The TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® has two keyboards: the Native iPad® Keyboard and the TI-Nspire™ Keyboard. ▶ To type text and numbers, tap to show the Native iPad® Keyboard, which is the standard alpha-numeric keyboard. Note: This keyboard changes when you select language options. ▶ To insert common TI-Nspire™ functions, templates, and math expressions, tap to show the TI-Nspire™ Keyboard.
9 Getting Started
Using Custom TI Keyboard for Dialog Every dialog inside the application has a custom keyboard available. Example: Go to Graphs > Tools > Window/Zoom > Window Settings . The Window Settings dialog appears. Tap in any field. The custom keyboard for dialog is available. Note: The following keys are not available.
• Clears the Clipboard to prevent the pasting of unauthorized information. • Logs out of Dropbox and does not retain the Dropbox ID. To Reset Content: 1. From the TI-Nspire™ Home screen, tap Settings . 2. Tap Reset Content. An alert message appears. 3. To proceed with the reset, tap Reset. After the reset is complete, the TI-Nspire™ Home Screen reappears.
Web address http://education.ti.com stored as a QR Code®. Typically, the QR Code® image is printed or projected so that you can extract the information using your device camera. TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® supports QR Code® scanning with the camera. Note: You can use the App to scan a QR Code® embedded on a Notes page without using the camera. For details, refer to Using a Displayed QR Code®. To Scan a QR Code® with the Camera: 1. Start on the Home Screen of the App. 2. Tap the scanning tool on the toolbar.
13
Working with Documents All work created using TI-Nspire™ applications is stored in a TI-Nspire™ document (.tns file), which you can share with others. A document consists of one or more problems and each problem contains one or more pages. A single page is displayed in the work area. All work occurs in the applications within pages. When you add a new document, the selected application is the first page of the document. The TI-Nspire™ Toolbar. Page Sorter. Document toolbar. Document work area.
• Dropbox folders - These are folders that have been synchronized with Dropbox. You cannot delete these folders. You can, however, synchronize them with your Dropbox account, add or delete documents, and select to show or hide them from the TI-Nspire™ Home screen. • Created folders - These are folders you create. You can edit and delete these folders, and add or delete documents. • MyLib folder - The MyLib folder contains library documents.
Undo/Redo. Undo or Redo the last action. Tap to Undo. Touch and hold to display Redo option. Camera. Take a photo, add a photo, or insert an existing photo in a document. Note: You can insert photos in the Graphs, Geometry, Data & Statistics, and Notes applications.
Using TI-Nspire™ Page Sorter The TI-Nspire™ Page Sorter contains tools available for use in open documents. Hide or Show Pages To show or hide pages in an open document: 1. Tap the Page Sorter icon to show pages. Note: All pages in the document will slide open from the right. 2. Tap the Page Sorter icon or anywhere on the screen to hide the pages. Move a Page ▶ Press and hold a page to move to a different position. Page Options 1. Double tap on a page to see available options.
Hide or Show Problem 1. Tap once on the problem name to show all pages. 2. Tap once to on the problem name to hide all pages. Rename a Problem 1. Tap twice on the problem name. 2. The keyboard appears. 3. Type the new problem name. 4. Tap on the dismiss key to hide (or dismiss) the keyboard. Switch Pages To switch to the previous page, or switch to the next page, swipe from the edge of a page.
Note: The "Swipe from the edges to navigate pages." dialogue box will appear after a new installation or after an app update. Exploring the Document Work Area The document work area consists of the application toolbar, the open document, and the page sorter. From open documents on the work area, you can add, delete, and rearrange pages in documents, and you can rename problems.
Page Sorter. Displays thumbnail sketches of all pages in all problems in the current document. Swipe up or down to view pages off the screen. Application. Icon indicates which application is active in the work area. Calculator Graphs Geometry Lists & Spreadsheet Data & Statistics Notes 1.2 Problem/Page Number. Displays the problem number followed by the page number. Tools. Opens the tools menu for the active application. Tools Search allows you to search options and menus.
Show/Hide. In the Graphs application, shows or hides the keyboard. Opening a New Document 1. On the TI-Nspire™ Home screen, tap New. The New menu opens. 2. Tap an application name. A new document opens with the selected application as the first page. The new document is assigned a default name.
2. Tap Problem. 3. Tap the type of problem you want to add to the document. A new problem is added beneath the current problem in the page sorter. Note: To rename the problem, double-tap the problem name, type the new name, and then tap return. Deleting Pages from Documents 1. In the page sorter, tap the page you want to delete to select it. 2. Tap the page again to open the context menu. 3. Tap Delete. • • To delete the page, tap Delete Problem Page.
Changing Document Settings Document settings control how all numbers, including elements or matrices and lists, are displayed in TI-Nspire™ documents. You can change the default settings at any time, and you can specify settings for a specific document. Complete the following steps to customize the settings that are applied to your document. 1. Create a new document or open an existing document. 2. Tap Settings . When you open Document Settings the first time, the default settings are displayed. 3.
Field Value Vector Format • • • Rectangular Cylindrical Spherical Base • • • Decimal Hex Binary Unit System (CAS) • • SI Eng/U.S. 4. Select the desired settings. 5. Choose one of the following options: • • • To apply the customized settings to ALL documents, tap Make Default. To apply the settings to the open document only, tap Done. To restore default settings, tap Restore.
The app opens your default email client, with the document as an attachment. 4. Enter the email address and tap Send. Exporting a Document as a PDF To export a document as a PDF, tap Share . 1. Tap Export As PDF. The app opens a screen showing the PDF. 2. Tap Open In . The toolbar may hide after a few seconds. Tap the screen to show the toolbar. 3. Tap any of the icons to indicate where you want to export the PDF.
Working with Photos in Documents Photos can be used in the TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® for reference, assessment, and instructional purposes. What You Can Do Add photos to the following TI-Nspire™ applications: • Graphs • Geometry • Data & Statistics • Notes What You Must Know • In the Graphs, Geometry, and Data & Statistics applications, photos are set in the background behind the axis and other objects.
The photo is inserted into the active document. Copying and Pasting Photos in the Notes Application You can copy and paste photos in the Notes application. ▶ To copy a photo, tap the photo to open the context menu, and then tap Copy. ▶ To paste a photo, tap the area in the document where you want to insert the photo, and then tap Paste. Resizing Photos You can resize photos in all applications that use photos. 1. Select the photo.
Calculator Application The Calculator application enables you to enter and evaluate math expressions. You can define variables, functions, and programs in Calculator. When you define or edit a variable, function, or program, it becomes available to other applications—such as Graphs or Geometry—that are part of the same problem. What You Can Do The Calculator Tools menu provides the tools you need to: • Complete actions. • Work with numbers.
Accessing Calculator History Items You cannot edit an expression if the result has been calculated. However, you can copy the expression from the history and paste it into the entry line. Copying History Items 1. Drag the work area up or down to find the expression or result you want to copy. 2. Tap the expression to select it and open the context menu. 3. Tap Paste History to copy the expression into the active entry line. Copying Part of an Expression 1. Tap the expression to select it. 2.
Entry line. Type or insert a math expression in the entry line. Tap ENTER to evaluate the expression. You can also insert functions, symbols, templates, or expressions from Utilities . Note: If the keyboard is hidden, tap the entry line to show it. Calculator work area. As you evaluate expressions, both the expression and result are saved in Calculator history. To distinguish between each saved expression and result, every other entry line is shaded.
3. Tap to return the cursor to the baseline. 4. To complete the expression: Tap . 5. Tap ENTER to evaluate the expression. The expression is displayed in standard mathematical notation, and result is displayed on the right side of the entry line. If a result does not fit on the same line with the expression, it is displayed on the next line. The expression and the result are added to the Calculator history.
Utilities menus open to the last menu used. For example, if Symbols was the last menu accessed, it opens by default the next time you tap . To insert a symbol 1. Tap Symbols to open the Symbols palette. 2. Tap a symbol to insert it into the entry line. Note: Drag the list of symbols up and down to view all available symbols. To insert an item from the catalog 1. Tap Catalog to view the list of available functions and commands. 2.
3. Slide the button to the right to enable the Tools Wizard. 4. Select the function you want to insert. (The function must have wizard support.) 5. Tap Done. The wizard opens and prompts for each argument before the function is inserted into the entry line. 6. Enter the arguments needed for the selected function. Note: If the keyboard is needed to complete an entry, it opens when you tap the field. 7. Tap OK as needed to complete entries in each prompt for the selected function.
Using an Expression Template Suppose you want to evaluate : 1. Tap the entry line to show the keyboard. 2. Tap . The algebraic sum template is inserted into the entry line. Small blocks represent elements that you can enter. Note: The blue line on the top of this key indicates this key has alternate functions. Touch and hold the key to access the alternate function. 3.
Example: Convert 528 minutes to hours. The desired expression is 528•_min►_hr. 1. Tap 2. Tap Utilities on the entry line. , then tap Unit Conversions . 3. Tap Conversion Assistant, then tap Done. The Unit Conversion Assistant dialog box displays: 4. Tap the Category list and select Time. Then tap < Unit Conversion Assistant. 5. Tap the From list and select min (minute) . Then tap < Unit Conversion Assistant.
Note: You can select Use existing unit at the bottom of the list if you have already entered a unit. In this example, you might have already entered 528•_min. 6. Tap the To list and select hr (hour) . Then tap < Unit Conversion Assistant. 7. Tap OK to paste _min►_hr to the entry line. 8. Tap enter to evaluate the expression. Note: • The last Category, From, and To selections will be retained until the language is changed, or the app is uninstalled or upgraded.
• 37 Temperature Calculator Application
Variables Overview A variable is a defined value that can be used multiple times in a problem. You can define a value or function as a variable within each application. Within a problem, variables are shared by TI-Nspire™ applications. For example, you can create a variable in Calculator, and then use or modify that variable in Graphs, Geometry, or Lists & Spreadsheet within the same problem. Each variable has a name and definition.
Data type Examples Expression 2.54 1.25E6 2p List {2, 4, 6, 8} {1, 1, 2} {"red", "blue", "green"} Matrix (x-2)2 This can be entered as: [1,2,3;3,6,9] Character string "Hello" Function, program myfunc( arg ) Measurement area "xmin/10" "The answer is:" ellipse( x, y, r1, r2) perimeter length slope angle Naming Variables and Functions Names for variables and functions that you create must meet the following naming rules.
• CAS: If you want a variable to be treated as a type of unit (such as _m or _ft ), use an underscore as the first character of the name. You cannot use any other underscores in the name. • You cannot use an underscore as the first character of a name. • You cannot use a pre-assigned variable, function, or command name, such as Ans, min, or tan. • Library documents and library objects are subject to additional naming restrictions. For more information, see Libraries.
Note: Use the right, left, up, and down arrows to move the cursor within the expression or function. Make sure the cursor is positioned correctly in the entry line before tapping ENTER to create the variable. Entering Multiple Variables on the Entry Line To enter several variables on a single line, separate them with a colon (:). Only the result of the last expression is shown.
2. Tap Store. var := appears before the selected value. This is the default name. . 3. Replace the default name var with the variable name you want to give the value. 4. Tap ENTER. The value is saved to that variable name, and the stored value or its name appears in bold text to indicate that it is a stored value.
Creating Variables in Lists & Spreadsheet Naming a list at the top of a Lists & Spreadsheet column or creating a variable from a cell value automatically stores that value as a list variable. After defining the variable, you can link to it from the Graphs, Geometry, Calculator, and Data & Statistics applications as well as from other Lists & Spreadsheet pages within the current problem. Note: When naming variables, use a name that does not exist in the current problem.
1. Tap the cell that contains the value you want to share, and then tap again to open the context menu. 2. Tap Store. A formula is inserted into the cell with var as a placeholder for the variable name. 3. Replace the letters "var" with a name for the variable. 4. Tap return. The value is now available as a variable in other applications within the same problem. Adjusting Variable Values with a Slider A slider control lets you interactively adjust or animate the value of a numeric variable.
Horizontal slider for adjusting variable v1. Minimized vertical slider for adjusting variable v2. Note: TI-Nspire™ version 4.2 or higher is required for opening .tns files containing sliders on Notes pages. Inserting a Slider Manually 1. From a Graphs, Geometry, or Data & Statistics page, select Actions > Insert Slider. —or— From a Notes page, make sure the cursor is not in a math box or chem box, and then select Insert > Insert Slider. The Slider Settings screen opens.
2. Enter the desired values, and tap OK. The slider is displayed. On a Graphs, Geometry, or Data & Statistics page, handles are displayed to let you move or stretch the slider. To remove the handles and use the slider, tap an empty space in the work area. You can show the handles anytime by selecting Move from the slider's context menu. 3. To adjust the variable, slide the pointer (or tap the arrows on a minimized slider).
Automatic Sliders in Graphs Sliders can be created for you automatically in the Graphs application and in the analytic window of the Geometry application. You are offered automatic sliders when you define certain functions, equations, or sequences that refer to undefined variables. Linking a Lists & Spreadsheet Cell or Column to a Variable When you link a cell or column to a variable, Lists & Spreadsheet updates the values to reflect the current value of the variable.
3. Tap Link. 4. Tap the name of the variable to insert it into the cell. The value of the variable is displayed in the cell. Linking a Column to an Existing List Variable To view or edit values in a list variable, link a column to the list variable. The list can be any shared list in the current problem and can be defined in Graphs, Geometry, Calculator, or any instance of Lists & Spreadsheet.
The column shows the list elements. Locking and Unlocking Variables Locking a variable protects it from modification or deletion, and prevents unintended changes to a defined variable. For example, you may want to lock variables that define time or altitude to ensure integrity. You cannot lock the following variables: • System variable ans • stat. and tvm. variable groups Locking Variables 1. Go to the Calculator application, and tap the entry line to show the keyboard. 2. Tap Tools . 3.
Locked variables display a lock icon on the variable menu list. Note: The Lock command clears the Redo/Undo history when applied to unlocked variables. Unlocking Variables To modify or delete a locked variable, you must unlock the variable. 1. Tap Tools and go to Actions > Lock. 2. Tap Unlock Variable to enter the function into the entry line. 3. Tap , and then tap the locked variable name. 4. Press ENTER to remove the locked status. The result Done indicates the variable is now unlocked.
51
Graphs Application The Graphs application lets you create, manipulate, analyze, and trace graphs of mathematical relations. What You Can Do • Define and explore functions and other relations, such as inequalities, parametrics, polars, sequences, and differential equation solutions. • Graph and explore linear and conic equations analytically in a two-dimensional coordinate system. Analyze lines, circles, ellipses, parabolas, hyperbolas, and general conic equations.
Note: The list of attributes is different for different types of objects. 3. Select the items to change. Changes are applied as you select them. Animating a Point on a Graph or Object 1. Tap the point. 2. Tap Inspector to display the point's attributes. 3. Drag the Animation Speed slider to set the speed and start the animation. Inserting a Background Photo The Insert Photo Geometry page. tool lets you insert a photo as a background for any Graphs or Adding Text to the Graphs or Geometry Work Area 1.
4. To edit the text, double-tap it. Adding a Graphs Page To get started with the Graphs application, add a Graphs page to an existing document. Tap Add, and then tap . A new Graphs page appears, showing the Graphs Toolbar, entry line, and work area. Graphs Toolbar • Tap Tools to create and explore graphs. • Tap Inspector to change the appearance of a graph.
• Tap to change the settings used by the Geometry and Graphs applications. • Tap to view or edit an expression from the graph history. • Tap to hide or show the keyboard and the entry line. Entry line. Lets you define the relations that you want to graph. The default graph type is Function, so the form f1(x )= is displayed initially. You can define 99 relations of each type. Graphs Work Area • Shows graphs of relations that you define on the entry line.
Manipulating a Function by Dragging Linear Function • To translate, grab near the middle of the graph, and then drag. • To rotate, grab near the ends of the graph, and then drag. Quadratic Function • To translate, grab near the vertex of the graph, and then drag. • To stretch, grab away from the vertex of the graph, and then drag. Sine or Cosine Function • To translate, grab near the axis of vertical symmetry of the graph, and then drag.
3. Tap the specific template for the equation. For example, tap y=a•x 2 +b•x+c to define a parabola. The entry line includes a symbol to indicate the type of equation. 4. Type the coefficients into the equation template. 5. Tap ENTER. Graphing Relations Relation graphing is available on Graphs pages and in the Analytic Window of Geometry pages. You can define relations using ≤, <, =, >, or ≥. The inequality operator ( ≠) is not supported in relation graphing.
Relation type The above relations on domains restricted by rectangles Examples • x3+y3-6*x*y=0 • y=sin(x) and -2π
Warning and Error Message Error Condition Additional Information Relation input not supported Relation input not supported Note: The following relation inputs are supported: • Relations using ≤, <, =, >, or ≥. • Polynomial relations in x and y • Relations equivalent to y=f(x) or x=g(y) or corresponding inequalities • The above relations on domains restricted by rectangles Domain Restrictions not supported for certain classes of relations equivalent to y=f(x) or x=g(y) or corresponding inequalities.
Graphing Polar Equations 1. In the Graphing view, tap Tools and go to Graph Entry/Edit > Polar. 2. Type an expression for rn( θ). 3. (Optional) Edit the default values for θmin, θmax , and θstep. 4. Tap ENTER.
Using the Text Tool to Graph Equations 1. In the Graphs application, tap Tools and go to Actions > Text. 2. Tap the work area to place the text box and display the keyboard. 3. Type an "x=" or "y=" equation, such as x=sin(y)*2, or type an inequality, such as x<2*sin(y), and tap ENTER. 4. Drag the text object to either axis to graph the equation.
Graphing a Scatter Plot 1. In the Graphs application, tap Tools and go to Graph Entry/Edit > Scatter Plot. 2. Use one of the following methods to specify two lists to plot as x and y. - Tap to select a list variable that you have defined in the current problem. - Type the name of an existing list variable, such as v1. Type the list elements directly (for example, type {1,2,3}. 3. Tap ENTER to plot the data, and then zoom the work area to view the plotted data.
4. Tap ENTER. Defining a Custom Sequence A custom sequence plot shows the relationship between two sequences by plotting one on the x axis and the other on the y axis. This example simulates the Predator-Prey model from biology. 1. Use the relations shown here to define two sequences: one for a rabbit population, and another for a fox population. Replace the default sequence names with rabbit and fox. .05 = the growth rate of rabbits if there are no foxes .001 = the rate at which foxes can kill rabbits .
3. Specify the rabbit and fox sequences to plot on the x and y axes, respectively. 4. Tap ENTER to create the custom plot. 5. Zoom the window to the Zoom - Fit setting. 6. Explore the custom plot by dragging the point that represents the initial term.
Graphing Differential Equations ODE entry line: • y1 ODE identifier • Expression k·y1 defines the relation • Fields (1,1) for specifying initial condition • Buttons for adding initial conditions and setting plot parameters Slider added for adjusting coefficient k of the ODE Slope field A solution curve passing through the initial condition To Graph a Differential Equation: 1. In the Graphing view, tap Tools and go to Graph Entry/Edit > Diff Eq.
3. Enter the initial condition for the independent value x and for y1 . 0 0 Note: The x value(s) are common to all the ODEs in a problem but can be entered 0 or modified only in the first ODE. 4. Tap Edit Parameters to set the plot parameters. Select a numerical Solution Method, and then set any additional parameters. You can change these parameters anytime. 5. Tap OK. 6. Zoom the window as necessary to view the graph.
To remove the table, tap Tools and go to Table > Remove Table. Note: For details about using tables, see Working with Tables. Accessing the Graph History For each problem, the Graphs application automatically stores a history of defined relations, such as functions f1 through f99 and sequences u1 through u99. You can view and edit these items. Viewing the History of the Current Relation Type 1.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the defined relations. Customizing the Graphs Work Area Note: Rescaling in the Graphs application affects only the graphs, plots, and objects that reside in the Graphing view. It has no effect on objects in the underlying Plane Geometry view. Zooming/Rescaling Manually ▶ To rescale the x and y axes proportionally, pinch the work area. ▶ To rescale only one axis, tap Tools then drag along the axis.
3. Select the items to change. Changes are applied as you select them. Tracing Graphs or Plots 1. In the Graphing view, tap Tools and go to Trace > Graph Trace. The Graph Trace tool appears in the Graphs toolbar, the trace cursor appears, and the cursor coordinates are displayed in the lower right corner. 2. Explore a graph or plot: - Tap a point on a graph or plot to move the trace cursor to that point. - Tap or on the Graph Trace tool to step the cursor along the current graph or plot.
Introduction to Geometric Objects Geometry tools are accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications. You can use these tools to draw and investigate objects such as points, lines, and shapes. • The Graphing view shows the Graphs work area superimposed on the Geometry work area. You can select, measure, and alter objects in both work areas. • The Plane Geometry view shows only the objects created in the Geometry application.
Objects Created in the Geometry Application Points, lines, and shapes created in the Geometry application are not analytic objects. • Points that define these objects do not reside on the graph plane. Objects created here are visible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications, but they are unaffected by changes to the Graphs x,y axes. • You cannot obtain the coordinates of an object’s points.
2. Tap Coordinates . If you move the point to a different location, the coordinates follow the point and update automatically. Bounded Area (Area Between Curves) Note: To avoid unexpected results when using this feature, make sure the document setting for "Real or Complex Format" is set to Real. You can use the Graphs application to access the area between curves. When you calculate the area between curves, each curve must be: • A function with respect to x.
3. Tap . 4. Tap cos and x, then tap ENTER. For this example the graph now shows f1(x)=sin(x) and f2(x)=cos(x) function(s). 5. Tap Tools and go to Analyze Graph > Bounded Area . The Bounded Area tool appears in the application Toolbar. You are prompted to set the lower and upper bounds. 6. Tap or drag two points to define the bounds. The area becomes shaded, and the area value is displayed. The value is always non-negative, regardless of the interval direction.
updated . • To change the lower or upper bound, drag it or type new coordinates for it. You cannot move a bound that resides on an intersection. However, the point moves automatically as you edit or manipulate the curves. • To redefine a curve, either manipulate it by dragging or edit its expression in the entry line. Note: If an endpoint resided originally on an intersection, and the redefined functions no longer intersect, the shading and area value disappear.
Using the Calculate Tool The Calculate tool is available in the Graphs and Geometry applications. It lets you evaluate a math expression you have entered as a text object. You can edit an evaluated expression, and then re-evaluate it. Entering the Expression 1. Tap Tools and go to Actions > Text. 2. Tap the work area to place the text box and display the keyboard. 3. Type the expression, such as (1/4)2*2, and tap ENTER. Note: Do not include variables in the expression. Calculating the Result 1.
Creating Shapes Using Gestures (MathDraw) The MathDraw tool lets you use touchscreen gestures to create points, lines, circles, and other shapes. • MathDraw is available in Geometry and Graphing. • Graphing view when the x scale and y scale are identical. This avoids non-circular ellipses and non-square rectangles appearing as circles and squares. Note: MathDraw is not available in the 3D Graphing. Activating MathDraw 1. Tap Add, and then tap 2. Tap Tools . . 3. Tap Actions menu, select MathDraw.
Note: The default tolerance for detecting parallel/perpendicular lines is 12.5 degrees. This tolerance can be redefined using a variable named ti_gg_fd.angle_tol. You can change the tolerance in the current problem by setting this variable in the calculator app to a value in the range 0 through 45 (0=no parallel/perpendicular detection). Drawing Circles and Ellipses To create a circle or ellipse, use the touchscreen to draw the approximate shape.
Note: The default step value for quantization of the parabola coefficients is 1/32. The denominator of this fraction can be redefined using a variable named ti_gg_fd.par_ quant. You can change the step value in the current problem by setting this variable to a value greater or equal to 2. A value of 2, for example, produces a step value of 0.5. Using MathDraw to Measure an Angle To measure the angle between two existing lines, use the touchscreen to draw a circle arc from one of the lines to the other.
Sticky Tool in Geometry and Graphing Sticky Tool is available in Geometry and Graphing. Note: In the Graphs application, go to Tools > Geometry. When a Geometry tool has the capability to remain active, it will display a lock element along with the tool icon. Lock Element icon Unlocked/Single-use icon Locked/Multi-use icon Note: All tools will open in the default or unlocked/single-use state. The icon will appear to the left of the tool.
Tap the X to close the tool. -orTap the unlocked/single-use state. Note: The user can also toggle between icon.
81
3D Graphing The 3D Graphing view lets you create and explore three-dimensional graphs. What You Can Do • Create and edit 3D functions of the form z(x,y). • Create and edit 3D parametric plots. • Show and hide selected graphs. • Set the background color and apply wire and surface colors to graphs. Tools Search Tools Search allows you to search options and menus. It is available across all applications in the TI-Nspire™ App.
• Tap to hide or show the keyboard and the entry line. Entry line. Lets you define 3D graphs. The default graph type is 3D Function, indicated by z 1(x,y )=. 3D Graphs Work Area. Shows a 3D box containing graphs that you define. Pinch to zoom the area, drag to rotate the box. Graphing 3D Functions 1. In the 3D Graphing view, tap Tools and go to 3D Graph Entry/Edit > Function. The keyboard and the entry line appear. 2. Enter the expression that defines the graph.
The keyboard and the entry line appear. 2. Type the equations that define the graph. 3. (Optional) Tap to set the 3D plotting parameters tmin, tmax , umin, and umax . 4. Tap ENTER to draw the graph and hide the entry line and keyboard. You can show the entry line and keyboard anytime by tapping on the Graphs Toolbar.
Zooming and Rotating the 3D View Zooming ▶ Pinch the work area to zoom in or out. Rotating Manually ▶ Drag in any direction to rotate all objects in 3D Graphing view. Rotating Automatically 1. Tap Tools and go to Actions > Auto Rotation. The Auto Rotation tool around the z axis. appears, and the graph rotates continuously 2. To stop the rotation, tap X on the tool. Editing a 3D Graph 1. Double-tap the graph or its label to display the expression in the entry line.
3. Select the items to change. Changes are applied as you select them. Showing or Hiding a Graph’s Label 1. Tap the graph to select it, and then tap it again to show its context menu. 2. Tap Hide Label or Show Label. Showing and Hiding 3D Graphs 1. In the 3D Graphing view, tap Tools The Hide/Show tool and go to Actions > Hide/Show. appears, and all hidden items are displayed in gray. 2. Tap a graph to change its hide/show state. 3. To apply the changes, tap X on the tool.
Customizing the 3D Viewing Environment Changing the Background Color 1. Tap the 3D box to select it. Note: If the box is hidden, tap Tools 2. Tap Inspector and go to View > Show Box. . 3. Tap Fill Color, and then select a color to apply it to the background. Changing the 3D Projection 1. Tap the and go to View. 2. Tap Orthographic Projection or Perspective View.
Showing or Hiding the Box, Axes, and Legend 1. Tap Tools and go to View. 2. Tap the name of the element to show or hide. Changing the 3D Aspect Ratio 1. Tap Tools and go to Range/Zoom > Aspect Ratio. 2. Enter values for the x, y, and z axes. The default value for each axis is 1. Changing the Range of the 3D Box ▶ Tap Tools and go to Range/Zoom > Range Settings .
89
Geometry Application The Geometry application lets you create, manipulate, measure, transform, and animate geometric objects. What You Can Do • Create and explore points and lines, such as line segments, vectors, and circle arcs. • Create and explore geometric shapes, such as circles, ellipses, polygons, and conics. • Animate any point created as a point on an object or graph. • Explore object transformations, including symmetry, reflection, translation, rotation, and dilation.
Note: The list of attributes is different for different types of objects. 3. Select the items to change. Changes are applied as you select them. Animating a Point on a Graph or Object 1. Tap the point. 2. Tap Inspector to display the point's attributes. 3. Drag the Animation Speed slider to set the speed and start the animation. Inserting a Background Photo The Insert Photo Geometry page. tool lets you insert a photo as a background for any Graphs or Adding Text to the Graphs or Geometry Work Area 1.
4. To edit the text, double-tap it. Adding a Geometry Page To get started with the Geometry application, add a Geometry page to an existing document. Tap Add, and then tap . A new Geometry page appears, showing the Geometry Toolbar and work area. Geometry Toolbar • Tap Tools to create and explore Geometry objects. • Tap Inspector to change the appearance of a selected item such as a geometric shape.
Introduction to Geometric Objects Geometry tools are accessible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications. You can use these tools to draw and investigate objects such as points, lines, and shapes. • The Graphing view shows the Graphs work area superimposed on the Geometry work area. You can select, measure, and alter objects in both work areas. • The Plane Geometry view shows only the objects created in the Geometry application.
Objects Created in the Geometry Application Points, lines, and shapes created in the Geometry application are not analytic objects. • Points that define these objects do not reside on the graph plane. Objects created here are visible in both the Graphs and Geometry applications, but they are unaffected by changes to the Graphs x,y axes. • You cannot obtain the coordinates of an object’s points.
Creating Geometric Shapes 1. Tap Tools , select Shapes , and select the type of object, such as Polygon. (In the Graphs application, go to Geometry > Shapes > Polygon.) 2. Tap existing points or locations on the work area to define the object. For example, tap two locations to define the center and radius of a circle. As you create a shape, a tool is shown in the application Toolbar (for example, Polygon ). To cancel the shape, tap the X on the tool.
Measurement Type Use to Measure... Slope Slope of a Line, Ray, Segment, or Vector Angle Angles in the range from 0° to 180° (0 radians to π radians in the Graphs application) Directed Angle Directed angles in the range from 0° to 360° (0 radians to 2π radians) and from -360° to 0° (-2π radians to 0 radians). Transforming Objects 1. Tap Tools , select Transformation, and select the type of transformation, such as Symmetry. (In the Graphs application, go to Geometry > Transformation > Symmetry.) 2.
While a construction is in progress, a tool appears in the application Toolbar (for example, Parallel ). To cancel, tap the X on the tool. Construction Type Description Midpoint Bisects a segment or sets a midpoint between any two points. The points can be on a single object, on separate objects, or on the work area. Parallel Line Creates a parallel line with respect to any existing line. The existing line can be a Graphs axis or any side of a triangle, square, rectangle, or polygon.
Construction Type Description Angle Bisector Creates an angle bisector. The points of the angle can be on existing objects, or they can be locations on the work area. Locus Lets you explore the range of motion of one object with respect to another object as constrained by a shared point. Compass Operates similarly to a geometric compass used for drawing circles on paper.
Using the Calculate Tool The Calculate tool is available in the Graphs and Geometry applications. It lets you evaluate a math expression you have entered as a text object. You can edit an evaluated expression, and then re-evaluate it. Entering the Expression 1. Tap Tools and go to Actions > Text. 2. Tap the work area to place the text box and display the keyboard. 3. Type the expression, such as (1/4)2*2, and tap ENTER. Note: Do not include variables in the expression. Calculating the Result 1.
The MathDraw tool using the tool. appears in the application Toolbar. You can begin Canceling MathDraw ▶ When you have finished using the MathDraw tool, tap the X on the tool. Creating Points To create a labeled point, tap in an open area. • If the point is close to an existing line, segment, ray, geometric conic (including circles), or polygon, the point snaps to that object. You can also place a point on the intersection of any two of those types of objects.
Drawing Triangles To create a triangle, draw a triangle-like shape. • If a drawn vertex is close to an existing point, the vertex snaps to the point. Drawing Rectangles and Squares To create a rectangle or square, use the touchscreen to draw the perimeter. • If the drawn shape is nearly square, a square is created. • If the drawn shape is elongated, a rectangle is created. • If the center of a square is close to an existing point, the square snaps to that point.
Using MathDraw to Erase To erase objects, use the touchscreen to drag left and right, similar to the motion of erasing a whiteboard. • The erasure area is the bounding rectangle of the erasure gesture. • All point objects and their dependents inside the erasure area are removed.
Sticky Tool in Geometry and Graphing Sticky Tool is available in Geometry and Graphing. Note: In the Graphs application, go to Tools > Geometry. When a Geometry tool has the capability to remain active, it will display a lock element along with the tool icon. Lock Element icon Unlocked/Single-use icon Locked/Multi-use icon Note: All tools will open in the default or unlocked/single-use state. The icon will appear to the left of the tool.
Tap the X to close the tool. -orTap the unlocked/single-use state. Note: The user can also toggle between icon.
105
Lists & Spreadsheet Application The Lists & Spreadsheet application provides a place to work with tabular data. What You Can Do • Define a column based on the contents of another column. • Work with variables created in the Graphs & Geometry and Calculator applications. • Plot table data using the Data & Statistics application. • Generate a table of values for a function or plot. • Perform statistical analysis on lists of data. Tools Search Tools Search allows you to search options and menus.
Linking a Column to a Variable 1. Tap the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) that you want to link to a variable. 2. Type the name of the list variable that you want to link to, and then tap return. Note: To view a list of available variables, tap var on the TI-Nspire™ Keyboard. Adding a Lists & Spreadsheet Page To get started with the Lists & Spreadsheet application, add a Lists & Spreadsheet page to an existing document. ▶ Tap Add, and then tap .
Column formula based on a variable Column formula based on another column Column formula that generates a sequence Creating Values Based on Another Column 1. Tap the column formula cell (the second cell from the top) of the column where you want to use a formula. 2. Type the expression for the formula after the = and tap ENTER. Note: Use brackets ([]) after any column letter you include in the formula. Generating a Column of Random Numbers 1.
4. Type any starting numbers required by the sequence in the Initial Terms field and separate them with commas. 5. Type a starting value for the independent variable ( n0), a maximum number of values to be generated ( nMax), and the step value ( nStep). Note: Type a maximum value for the sequence in the Ceiling Value field, if desired. 6. Tap OK. Graphing Spreadsheet Data Creating a Scatter Plot with Quick Graph 1. Name both of the columns to declare them as lists, and then select both columns. 2.
A capture expression is inserted. 5. Replace the letters “var” with the name of the variable to capture. Note: You can also select the variable name from the Variables menu by tapping var, and then tapping the desired variable. Using Table Data for Statistical Analysis Tools on the Statistics menu provide access to wizards that help you perform statistical analyses on the data in table columns.
3. Tap next to the Y List box to display a named list. Tap the name of the list for the Y List. 4. To store the regression equation in a specified variable, replace Save RegEqn To with the name of the variable. 5. Tap the 1st Result Column box and type c[] as the column letter for the first result column. 6. Tap OK. Note: The results are linked to the source data. Storing Statistical Results The Lists & Spreadsheet application stores statistical results using a variable-group name with the format stat.
1. Enter the X values of the data in column A. 2. Tap the top cell of column A and enter a name, such as DD1, for the X values. 3. Tap the column formula cell (second cell from the top) in column B. 4. Tap Tools and go to Statistics > Distributions > Normal Pdf . The Normal Pdf dialog box opens and displays fields for entering the arguments for the calculation. 5. Tap each field and provide:. - X Value: To use the list that you defined in step 2, tap the arrow and select the list name.
Supported Distribution Functions The following distributions are available from the Lists & Spreadsheet application. For more information regarding these functions, see the TI-Nspire™ Reference Guide. • To return a single distribution result based on a single value, type the function in a single cell. • To return a list of distribution results based on a list of values, type the function in a column formula cell. In this case, you specify a list (column) that contains the values.
This distribution is useful in determining the probability of an occurrence of any value between the lower and upper bounds in the normal distribution. It is equivalent to finding the area under the specified normal curve between the bounds. Inverse Normal (invNorm) Computes the inverse cumulative normal distribution function for a given area under the normal distribution curve specified by mean, μ, and standard deviation, s.
c 2 Pdf (c 2 Pdf()) Computes the probability density function ( pdf ) for the c 2 (chi-square) distribution at a specified x value. df (degrees of freedom) must be an integer > 0. The probability density function ( pdf ) is: This distribution is useful in determining the probability of the occurrence of a given value from a population with a c 2 distribution. The draw option is available when c 2 Pdf is invoked from a formula cell.
Binomial Pdf (binomPdf()) Computes a probability at x for the discrete binomial distribution with the specified numtrials and probability of success (p) on each trial. The x parameter can be an integer or a list of integers. 0{p{1 must be true. numtrials must be an integer > 0. If you do not specify x , a list of probabilities from 0 to numtrials is returned.
Poisson Pdf (poissPdf()) Computes a probability at x for the discrete Poisson distribution with the specified mean, μ, which must be a real number > 0. x can be an integer or a list of integers. The probability density function ( pdf ) is: This distribution is useful in determining the probability of obtaining a certain number of successes before a trial begins. For example, you could use this calculation to predict the number of heads that would occur in eight tosses of a coin.
▶ To remove a column from the table, click any cell, and then tap Tools Table > Delete Column. ▶ To display the list of plots, tap the drop-down arrow on the top cell of a column. Select an empty column, (unless you are replacing values already displayed), and then tap a function in the list to add its values to the column. ▶ To change the expression that defines a plot, tap the formula cell and edit the expression.
3. Replace the letters “var” with the name of the variable to capture from Graphs & Geometry. For example, type a or to view a list of available variables, tap var on the TI-Nspire™ Keyboard. The formula cell now contains an expression similar to =capture(a,0).
Note: The argument “0” tells Lists & Spreadsheet that you want to trigger each capture manually. 4. Tap Enter. 5. From the Graphs & Geometry application, move the point to a different location where x coordinate of the point is stored in a variable (a, in this example) referenced in the data capture expression. 6. Tap . The current a value is stored in the Lists & Spreadsheet application configured to capture the variable a. See Using Variables for more information on adding and using variables.
121
Data & Statistics Application The Data & Statistics Application enables teachers and students to create graphical displays and perform analysis on data stored in lists. Defining (or naming) sets of data using the Lists & Spreadsheet Application is the starting point for plotting and analyzing data. What You Can Do • Work with sets of data in different types of plots. • Work with sets of data in different types of charts. • Manipulate variables to explore and visualize data relationships.
-ORDrag either axis to shift the axis while retaining its scale. To restore the original size and location of the plotted data, tap Tools > Window/Zoom > Zoom-Data . Plotting a Value When you plot a value on an existing plot, it is displayed as a vertical line in the work area. You can plot a single number or any expression that evaluates to a number. If the value is dependent on the data, the line updates to reflect changes made when you drag a point or make changes in the Lists & Spreadsheet application.
2. Tap the add variable region on each axis to view defined variables. 3. Tap the variable name to add it to the selected axis to create a dot plot (frequency plot).
Working with Plots Dot Plots • Dot plots are also known as frequency plots, and represent one-variable numerical data. • Dot plots are the default plot type for numerical data. • One dot represents each value in the list. • Each dot is displayed on the axis at a point that corresponds to the value. • Box plots are used to plot one-variable numerical data in a modified box. • "Whiskers" extend from each end of the box.
Histograms • A histogram plots onevariable numerical data and depicts the distribution of data. • The number of bins displayed depends on the number of data points and how the points are distributed. • A value that occurs on the edge of a bin is counted in the bin to its right. Normal Probability Plots Shows one set of numerical data against the corresponding quartile (z) of the standard normal distribution.
Scatter Plots • Shows the relationship between two sets of numerical data. • You also plot a scatter plot using the Quick Graph tool in the Lists & Spreadsheet application. • This plot is a type of scatter plot in which data points are plotted and connected in order of appearance in the two variables. • An X-Y line plot depicts the relationship between two sets of data. • The left-most column of data is represented on the horizontal axis.
- Tap Analyze to choose analysis options such as add a moveable line, plot a value or function, or activate the Graph Trace tool. Working with Charts Dot Charts • The default plot type for categorical data is the dot chart. • When one variable is plotted, the value of each cell is represented as one dot. • The dots are stacked at the point on the axis that corresponds to the cell value. • Bar charts display categorical data. • The length of the bar represents the number of cases in the category.
Pie Charts A pie chart represents categorical data in a circular layout and uses a proportioned segment for each category. Exploring and Analyzing Data Plotted in a Chart • Drag a point to move it. as you move a point, the values associated with it change in the work area and in the list of variables. • From the Tools menu: - Tap Plot Type to choose another supported plot type.
Notes Application The Notes application enables you to create and share documents. What You Can Do • Create study notes to reinforce learning and review for exams. • Share a Notes document with others and use text formatting options so that each person's entries and comments appear in a different color or font. • Create and evaluate math expressions. • Create correctly formatted chemical formulas and equations. Tools Search Tools Search allows you to search options and menus.
3. Drag the handles to highlight the expression, math box, or chem box you want to select. 4. Tap Tools and go to Actions . 5. Tap Deactivate Selection. Activating a Selected Item 1. Tap the expression or box you want to select. 2. Tap Select. 3. Drag the handles to select the portion of the expression or text you want to activate. 4. Tap Tools and go to Actions . 5. Tap Activate Selection. Formatting Text in Notes 1. Tap the text you want to format, and than tap it again to open the context menu. 2.
4. Select the formatting you want to apply. Changes are applied as you select them. Inserting Comments, Shapes, and Calculations Inserting Comments You can insert Teacher or Review comments into a Notes page. Comments are labeled to make them easy to distinguish from the original text. 1. Tap the Notes work area where you want to insert a comment. 2. Tap Tools and go to Insert. 3. Tap Comment. 4. Tap Teacher or Reviewer to choose the comment type. 5. Type the comment text inside the comment box.
6. If needed, select the text and tap Inspector to apply formatting to the comment text. Inserting Geometric Shape Symbols Use geometric shapes to designate selected text as a geometric object such as an angle, circle, or line segment. 1. Tap the work area where you want to insert the shape, or select the text that you want designate as a shape. 2. Tap Tools and go to Insert. 3. Tap Shape. 4. Tap the shape name (such as segment or ray) to insert it before the selected item. Inserting Calculations 1.
3. Tap the type of calculation you want to insert, and then tap the function name to insert the expression. Working with Math Boxes Inserting a Math Box 1. Tap the Notes work area to place your cursor where you want to insert the math box. 2. Tap Tools and go to Insert. 3. Tap Math Box. If you are using an external keyboard, press " + M. 4. Type the expression inside the math box.
2. Tap Tools and go to Insert. 3. Tap Convert to Math Box. Inserting Chemical Equations Use chemical equation boxes (chem boxes) to type chemical formulas and equations such as: CH + 2O → CO + 2H O. Equations in a chem box cannot be evaluated or 4 balanced. 2 2 2 Entering a Chemical Equation 1. Position the cursor on the page where you want the equation. 2. Tap Tools and go to Insert. 3. Tap Chem Box. An empty chemical equation box is added to the page. 4. Type the equation in the box.
When you display the context menu for a selected expression or equation, the menu may include a Math Actions submenu that lists the available actions. Each action might prompt you for any needed parameters. The specific math actions listed depend on: • The type of expression or relation. • The operating system in use (numeric or CAS). Example of Math Actions in Notes 1. Insert a math box, and type the equation x 2+3x +1=0, but don't press Enter yet. Numeric OS CAS OS 2.
5. Tap OK to construct the completed expression and place it in the math box. Numeric OS CAS OS 6. Press Enter to complete the action. Numeric OS CAS OS 7. As a further exploration, select x 2+3·x +1. Do not include the "=0" portion. Numeric OS CAS OS 8. Display the context menu for the selected text, select Math Actions > Find Roots of Polynomial, and press Enter to complete the action. The action and its result are shown in a new math box.
If page layout options allow, the graph appears on the same page as the function or relation. Otherwise, the graph appears on a separate Graphs page. The type of graph created depends on the type of function or relation. Example of Graphing from Notes This example uses a Notes page to explore a quadratic function interactively. 1. Insert a math box on a new Notes page, and enter the following function definition: Define f1(x)=x2-1·x-4 2. Tap the expression to display its context menu.
3. Select Graph. The graph appears. The graph and the math box are linked so that any adjustment to one affects the other. 4. Explore the relationship between the defined function and its graph: - Drag the ends or center of the graph to manipulate it, and observe the changes to the function definition. —or— - 139 Edit the defined function in the math box, and observe the changes to the graph.
Using a Displayed QR Code® A QR Code® is an image that stores information, such as the address of a web site or TI-Nspire™ document, as a pattern of small squares. Web address http://education.ti.com stored as a QR Code®. Authors of TI-Nspire™ documents can insert or paste a QR Code® on any Notes page. Users viewing the document with TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® can tell the app to scan the code directly from the page and link to its associated target.
Note: The image must be entirely visible; the software will scan only the displayed region of the page. 2. Tap the Camera - - in the toolbar, and select Scan QR Code® from Page. If the target is a TI-Nspire™ document (.tns file), the App automatically downloads the document, saves and closes your current document, and opens the downloaded document. Otherwise, the App opens your web browser to resolve the target. How to Insert a QR Code® on a Notes Page You can add QR Code® images to a Notes page.
4. (Optional) add a tip for users of your document who might not know how to use the code. 5. Make sure the code is valid by testing it with the Scan QR Code® from Page feature.
143
Question Documents Overview The TI-Nspire™ App for iPad® enables you to receive question documents sent by your teacher via email. The question document may contain multiple pages and can contain any TI-Nspire™ application. When you tap question, the icon changes to show you which application is active. What You Can Do When you receive a question document from your teacher, you can: • Open the document and answer the questions. • Show your work if requested by the teacher.
5. Tap ENTER to complete the expression. Responding to Questions Teachers may send you any of the following types of questions. Tap a question type name to see how to respond to the question. Note: You may need to scroll to see the entire question. All parts of the question may not be visible on the page, and parts of a question may be hidden behind a graph or image. Multiple Choice Questions • Tap the option or options next to the response you want to select.
Equation Questions Type a response. If a graph is included in the question, the graph updates as you type the answer. Any functions entered show up on the graph, and the cursor remains in the answer box. You cannot manipulate the graph. Expression Questions Type a response. • If the teacher wants you to show your work, the response area has sections for you to enter the steps and a final answer. • If the response type is Number, your response must be in the form of a number.
Coordinate Points: (x,y) Questions Type an answer in the x-field box, and then type an answer in the y-field box. As you enter values, the points update on the graph work area. Coordinate Points: Drop Points Questions • Tap a location on the graph work area to drop a point at that location. • To move a point, touch and hold the point, and drag it to the new location. Lists Questions Type an answer in the desired cell. Continue to type answers in different cells until you are finished.
columns • Change the header row • Enter formulas • Switch to Table • Create plots Chemistry Questions Type a response. There is no need to insert a Chem box. Chemistry response areas are automatically formatted to accept properly formatted chemical formulas or equations. Image: Label Questions 1. Tap a label on the image. 2. Type a response in the label field.
Image: Point on Questions Tap the option or options next to the answer you want to select. Showing Your Work, Checking Answers, and Clearing Answers Showing Your Work The teacher may ask you to show work for your response. If so, the teacher provides the starting equation, and the response area has sections for entering your steps and for the final answer.
available after you answer the question. To check your answer: ▶ Tap Tools • If your answer is correct, a confirmation message is displayed. When you close the message: • and go to Check Answer. - A check mark is displayed next to the answer for multiple-choice questions. - The correct answer or suggested answer is displayed below the student response for all other question types. If your answer is incorrect, tap Try Again or Show Correct Answer.
151
Widgets All work that you create and save using TI-Nspire™ applications is stored as a document, which you can share with others using TI-Nspire™ software and with those using handhelds. You save these TI-Nspire™ documents as .tns files. A Widget is a .tns document that is stored in your MyWidgets folder.
153
Libraries Overview A library is a TI-Nspire™ document that contains a collection of variables, functions, and/or programs that have been defined as library objects. What You Can Do • Create library documents for storing user-defined variables, functions, or programs. • Use defined library objects in any TI-Nspire™ document. • Add library objects to the Catalog. • Update or refresh libraries so that objects are available to all documents. • Create shortcuts to library objects.
Creating Library Documents A document is regarded as a library when it is placed in the MyLib folder on the TI-Nspire™ Home screen. 1. Open a new TI-Nspire™ document and choose the Calculator application. 2. Name the document. • • Library document names must be a valid variable name, and they must not contain a period or begin with an underscore. A library document name must be between 1 and 16 characters long. 3. Drag the document to the MyLib folder. 4.
b) Tap Check Syntax & Store. If no errors are present, the new library object is successfully stored. 9. Refresh the libraries to include the new library object in the Libraries menu. Defining a Library Object in the Calculator Application 1. From an open Calculator document, tap Tools and go to Actions . 2. Tap Library. 3. Select Define LibPriv or Define LibPub. 4. Type the information needed to complete the function or program in the template. 5.
In library programs and functions defined as public, a comment line (©) immediately following the Prgm or Func line is automatically displayed as help in the Catalog. You could, for example, show a syntax reminder there. ▶ To enter a comment line, tap Tools and go to Actions > Insert Comment. Accessing Library Objects To use a library object in any TI-Nspire™ document, type the object's long name.
Viewing Arguments If you cannot remember the exact name or the order of arguments required for a private library object, you can: ▶ Open the library document that contains the object to view the arguments and other information. —or— ▶ Type getVarInfo [library name string] in any open document to view a list defined variables in an object. —or— ▶ Access the arguments and help through the Utilities menu. a) Tap Utilities > Libraries . b) Tap the name of the library you want to open.
3. Tap Refresh . The Libraries are updated to include all new and edited library objects.
Program Editor Overview The Program Editor enables you to define, edit, and manage user-defined functions and programs. What You Can Do • Use programming templates and dialog boxes to define function and programs with the correct syntax. • Enter multiple-line programming statements without using a special key sequence to add each line. • Create private and public library objects such as variables, functions, and programs. Tools Search Tools Search allows you to search options and menus.
Accessing the Program Editor Program Editor is accessible from the Calculator application. 1. Open a document with the Calculator 2. Tap Tools application active. and go to Functions and Programs . 3. Tap Program Editor. Options enable you to define a new program, open an existing program, or import a program from the Library. 4. Tap an option, complete the required information, and then tap OK. The Program Editor opens with the selected template active on the right side of the screen.
Program Editor work area. This is the default work area when Program Editor opens. If the Program Editor is not active, tap the right side of the screen. Status line. Shows the line number information and the name of the function or program being defined or edited. An asterisk (*) indicates that this function has been changed since the last time syntax was checked and the function was stored. Defining a New Program or Function From the Calculator application: 1. Tap Tools and go to Functions & Programs .
Entering Lines into a Function or Program The Program Editor does not execute the commands or evaluate expressions as you type them. They are executed only when you evaluate the function or run the program. • When arguments are required, type parameters in the parentheses that follow the program name. Separate parameters with a comma. • Type the lines of statements that make up your function or program between the Func and EndFunc (or Prgm or EndPrgm) lines.
If the syntax checker finds any errors, it displays an error message and positions the cursor near the first error. Storing a Function or Program You must store a function or program to make it accessible. The Program Editor automatically checks the syntax before storing. An asterisk (*) before the program or function name indicates that it has not been stored. To store a function or program: 1. From the Program Editor, tap Tools and go to Check Syntax and Store. 2. Tap Check Syntax & Store.
Running Programs and Evaluating Functions After defining and storing a program or function, you can use it from an application. All the applications can evaluate functions, but only the Calculator and Notes applications can run programs. The program statements are executed in sequential order (although some commands alter the program flow). The output, if any, is displayed in the application’s work area. • Program execution continues until it reaches the last statement or a Stop command.
3. If the program or function requires you to supply one or more arguments, type the values or variable names inside the parentheses. 4. Tap [ENTER]. Note: You can also run a program or function in Calculator or Notes applications by typing the name of the program with parentheses and any required arguments and tapping [ENTER]. Opening Functions or Programs for Editing Note: You cannot modify a locked program or function. To unlock the object, go to a Calculator page and use the Unlock command.
Opening a Function or Program in Program Editor 1. Tap Tools and go to Actions . 2. Tap Open. 3. Tap the function or program name to open it in Program Editor. Note: To close the function or program, tap Tools > Actions > Close. The program or function closes and the Calculator page becomes active. Importing Programs You can import a function or program defined as a library object into a Program Editor within the current problem. The imported copy is not locked, even if the original is locked.
5. If you want the imported object to have a different name, type the name in the Import As field. 6. Tap OK. The program opens in Program Editor. Using Sensor Data in Programs You can access sensor data from all connected sensor probes through your TI-Basic program by using this command: RefreshProbeVars statusVar • You must first launch the Vernier DataQuest™ application, or you will receive an error.
• Use of variable names without corresponding probes being physically attached will result in a "Variable not defined" error. • The RefreshProbeVars command will be a NOP (null command) on iOS. Collecting Sensor Data using RefreshProbeVars 1. Launch the Vernier DataQuest™ application. 2. Connect the sensor(s) you need to collect the data. 3. Run the program you wish to use to collect data in the calculator application. 4. Manipulate the sensors and collect the data.
© Wait for 1 second between samples Wait 1 EndFor Else Disp "Not ready.
171
General Information Texas Instruments Support and Service General Information: North and South America Home Page: education.ti.com KnowledgeBase and e-mail inquiries: education.ti.com/support Phone: (800) TI-CARES / (800) 842-2737 For North and South America and U.S. Territories International contact information: education.ti.com/support/worldwide For Technical Support Knowledge Base and support by e-mail: education.ti.com/support or ti-cares@ti.
173
C Index 3 3D aspect ratio, changing 3D functions graphing 3D graph changing appearance 3D Graphing view 3D graphs editing expressions range settings rotating setting background colors showing/hiding shrinking/magnifying 3D parametric equations graphing 88 83 85 82, 85 85 88 85 87 86 87 83 A angle bisector construction animating points appearance of 3D graph applications Geometry Graphs & Geometry arithmetic calculations aspect ratio, changing in 3D graphing attributes changing for objects automatic slide
F functions rotating stretching supported distributions translating L 56 56 113 56 G geometric objects introduction Geometry application gestures, to create shapes (MathDraw) graph changing appearance graphing 3D functions 3D parametric equations 3D view equations from context menu parametric equations polar equations relations scatter plots sequences time plots web plots Graphing view changing axes attributes Graphs & Geometry application 94 90 76, 99 85 83 83 82 56 137 59 60 57 62 62 62 62 68 52 H hid
Q QR Code® scan from a Notes page scanning with camera 140 11 R RefreshProbeVars relations graphing reset TI-Nspire™ content 168 57 10 S scan QR Code® on a notes page 140 scan QR Code® with camera 11 segment bisector 98 shapes creating 94 creating with MathDraw 76, 99 showing 3D graphs 86 sliders, adjusting variable values 44 sticky tool in geometry and graphing 79, 103 T text adding to work areas 53, 91 V variable, adjusting with a slider view 3D Graphing views 3D Graphing 44 82 85 W work areas ad
TI-Nspire™ CAS Reference Guide This guidebook applies to TI-Nspire™ software version 4.5. To obtain the latest version of the documentation, go to education.ti.com/go/download.
Important Information Except as otherwise expressly stated in the License that accompanies a program, Texas Instruments makes no warranty, either express or implied, including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, regarding any programs or book materials and makes such materials available solely on an "as-is" basis.
Contents Important Information ii Expression Templates 1 Alphabetical Listing 8 A B C D E F G I L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z 8 17 20 45 57 68 77 87 96 112 120 129 131 140 143 157 182 197 198 199 201 202 iii
Symbols 210 Empty (Void) Elements 236 Shortcuts for Entering Math Expressions 238 EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy 240 Constants and Values 242 Error Codes and Messages 243 Warning Codes and Messages 251 Support and Service 253 Texas Instruments Support and Service Service and Warranty Information Index iv 253 253 254
Expression Templates Expression templates give you an easy way to enter math expressions in standard mathematical notation. When you insert a template, it appears on the entry line with small blocks at positions where you can enter elements. A cursor shows which element you can enter. Position the cursor on each element, and type a value or expression for the element. /p keys Fraction template Example: Note: See also / (divide) , page 212.
/l keys Nth root template u keys e exponent template Example: Natural exponential e raised to a power Note: See also e^() , page 57. /s key Log template Example: Calculates log to a specified base. For a default of base 10, omit the base. Note: See also log() , page 107. Piecewise template (2-piece) Catalog > Example: Lets you create expressions and conditions for a two-piece piecewise function. To add a piece, click in the template and repeat the template. Note: See also piecewise() , page 133.
Piecewise template (N-piece) Lets you create expressions and conditions for an N-piece piecewise function. Prompts for N. Catalog > Example: See the example for Piecewise template (2piece). Note: See also piecewise() , page 133. System of 2 equations template Catalog > Example: Creates a system of two equations. To add a row to an existing system, click in the template and repeat the template. Note: See also system() , page 182. System of N equations template Lets you create a system of N equations.
Absolute value template Catalog > dd° mm’ss.ss’’ template Catalog > Example: Lets you enter angles in dd°mm’ss.ss ’’ format, where dd is the number of decimal degrees, mm is the number of minutes, and ss.ss is the number of seconds. Matrix template (2 x 2) Catalog > Example: Creates a 2 x 2 matrix. Matrix template (1 x 2) . Catalog > Example: Matrix template (2 x 1) Catalog > Example: Matrix template (m x n) The template appears after you are prompted to specify the number of rows and columns.
Matrix template (m x n) Catalog > Note: If you create a matrix with a large number of rows and columns, it may take a few moments to appear. Sum template (Σ) Catalog > Example: Note: See also Σ() ( sumSeq), page 224. Product template (Π) Catalog > Example: Note: See also Π() ( prodSeq), page 223. First derivative template Catalog > Example: The first derivative template can also be used to calculate first derivative at a point. Note: See also d() (derivative) , page 221.
Second derivative template Catalog > Example: The second derivative template can also be used to calculate second derivative at a point. Note: See also d() (derivative) , page 221. Nth derivative template Catalog > Example: The nth derivative template can be used to calculate the nth derivative. Note: See also d() (derivative) , page 221. Definite integral template Catalog > Example: Note: See also∫() integral() , page 221.
Limit template Use − or ( −) for left hand limit. Use + for Catalog > right hand limit. Note: See also limit() , page 6.
Alphabetical Listing Items whose names are not alphabetic (such as +, !, and >) are listed at the end of this section, page 210. Unless otherwise specified, all examples in this section were performed in the default reset mode, and all variables are assumed to be undefined. A abs() abs(Expr1) ⇒ expression Catalog > abs(List1) ⇒ list abs(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the absolute value of the argument. Note: See also Absolute value template, page 3.
Catalog > amortTbl() roundValue specifies the number of decimal places for rounding. Default=2. The columns in the result matrix are in this order: Payment number, amount paid to interest, amount paid to principal, and balance. The balance displayed in row n is the balance after payment n. You can use the output matrix as input for the other amortization functions ΣInt() and ΣPrn() , page 225, and bal() , page 17.
angle() angle(Expr1) ⇒ expression Catalog > In Degree angle mode: Returns the angle of the argument, interpreting the argument as a complex number. Note: All undefined variables are treated as In Gradian angle mode: real variables. In Radian angle mode: angle(List1) ⇒ list angle(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a list or matrix of angles of the elements in List1 or Matrix1, interpreting each element as a complex number that represents a two-dimensional rectangular coordinate point.
Output variable Description stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors stat.MSError Mean square for the errors stat.sp Pooled standard deviation stat.xbarlist Mean of the input of the lists stat.CLowerList 95% confidence intervals for the mean of each input list stat.
Output variable Description stat.MSBlock Mean squares for factor stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors stat.MSError Mean squares for the errors stat.s Standard deviation of the error COLUMN FACTOR Outputs Output variable Description stat. Fcol F statistic of the column factor stat.PValCol Probability value of the column factor stat.dfCol Degrees of freedom of the column factor stat.SSCol Sum of squares of the column factor stat.
Output variable Description stat.dfError Degrees of freedom of the errors stat.SSError Sum of squares of the errors stat.MSError Mean squares for the errors s Standard deviation of the error Ans /v keys Ans ⇒ value Returns the result of the most recently evaluated expression. approx() approx(Expr1) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the evaluation of the argument as an expression containing decimal values, when possible, regardless of the current Auto or Approximate mode.
►approxFraction() Catalog > Note: You can insert this function from the computer keyboard by typing @>approxFraction(...). approxRational() approxRational(Expr[, Tol ]) ⇒ expression Catalog > approxRational(List [, Tol ]) ⇒ list approxRational(Matrix [, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix Returns the argument as a fraction using a tolerance of Tol . If Tol is omitted, a tolerance of 5.E-14 is used. arccos() See cos⁻¹(), page 31. arccosh() See cosh⁻¹(), page 32. arccot() See cot ⁻¹(), page 33.
arcLen() arcLen(Expr1,Var,Start ,End) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the arc length of Expr1 from Start to End with respect to variable Var. Arc length is calculated as an integral assuming a function mode definition. arcLen(List1,Var,Start ,End) ⇒ list Returns a list of the arc lengths of each element of List1 from Start to End with respect to Var. arcsec() See sec ⁻¹(), page 158. arcsech() See sech⁻¹(), page 158. arcsin() See sin⁻¹(), page 168. arcsinh() See sinh⁻¹(), page 169.
augment() Catalog > Returns a new list that is List2 appended to the end of List1. augment(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns a new matrix that is Matrix2 appended to Matrix1. When the “,” character is used, the matrices must have equal row dimensions, and Matrix2 is appended to Matrix1 as new columns. Does not alter Matrix1 or Matrix2.
B bal() bal(NPmt ,N,I,PV ,[Pmt ], [FV], [PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt ], [roundValue ]) ⇒ value Catalog > bal(NPmt ,amortTable ) ⇒ value Amortization function that calculates schedule balance after a specified payment. N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt are described in the table of TVM arguments, page 195. NPmt specifies the payment number after which you want the data calculated. N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt are described in the table of TVM arguments, page 195.
►Base2 Catalog > Converts Integer1 to a binary number. Binary or hexadecimal numbers always have a 0b or 0h prefix, respectively. Use a zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h. 0b binaryNumber 0h hexadecimalNumber A binary number can have up to 64 digits. A hexadecimal number can have up to 16. Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as decimal (base 10). The result is displayed in binary, regardless of the Base mode. Negative numbers are displayed in “two's complement” form.
►Base10 Catalog > Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>Base10. Converts Integer1 to a decimal (base 10) number. A binary or hexadecimal entry must always have a 0b or 0h prefix, respectively. 0b binaryNumber 0h hexadecimalNumber Zero, not the letter O, followed by b or h. A binary number can have up to 64 digits. A hexadecimal number can have up to 16. Without a prefix, Integer1 is treated as decimal. The result is displayed in decimal, regardless of the Base mode.
binomCdf() binomCdf(n,p) ⇒ list Catalog > binomCdf(n,p,lowBound,upBound) ⇒ number if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are lists binomCdf(n,p,upBound)for P(0≤X≤upBound) ⇒ number if upBound is a number, list if upBound is a list Computes a cumulative probability for the discrete binomial distribution with n number of trials and probability p of success on each trial.
centralDiff() centralDiff(Expr1,Var [=Value ][,Step]) ⇒ expression Catalog > centralDiff(Expr1,Var [,Step])|Var=Value ⇒ expression centralDiff(Expr1,Var [=Value ][,List ]) ⇒ list centralDiff(List1,Var [=Value ][,Step]) ⇒ list centralDiff(Matrix1,Var [=Value ][,Step]) ⇒ matrix Returns the numerical derivative using the central difference quotient formula. When Value is specified, it overrides any prior variable assignment or any current “|” substitution for the variable. Step is the step value.
cFactor() cFactor( Expr1,Var) returns Expr1 factored with respect to variable Var. Catalog > Expr1 is factored as much as possible toward factors that are linear in Var, with perhaps non-real constants, even if it introduces irrational constants or subexpressions that are irrational in other variables. The factors and their terms are sorted with Var as the main variable. Similar powers of Var are collected in each factor.
charPoly() charPoly(squareMatrix,Var) ⇒ polynomial expression Catalog > charPoly(squareMatrix,Expr) ⇒ polynomial expression charPoly(squareMatrix1,Matrix2) ⇒ polynomial expression Returns the characteristic polynomial of squareMatrix . The characteristic polynomial of n×n matrix A, denoted by p A ( λ), is the polynomial defined by p (λ) = det(λ•I−A) A where I denotes the n×n identity matrix. squareMatrix1 and squareMatrix2 must have the equal dimensions.
χ2Cdf() Catalog > χ 2Cdf(lowBound,upBound,df ) ⇒ number if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are lists chi2Cdf(lowBound,upBound,df ) ⇒ number if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are lists Computes the χ 2 distribution probability between lowBound and upBound for the specified degrees of freedom df . For P( X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 0. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236.
χ2Pdf() Catalog > chi2Pdf(XVal ,df ) ⇒ number if XVal is a number, list if XVal is a list Computes the probability density function (pdf) for the χ 2 distribution at a specified XVal value for the specified degrees of freedom df . For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. ClearAZ Catalog > ClearAZ Clears all single-character variables in the current problem space.
colAugment() colAugment(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns a new matrix that is Matrix2 appended to Matrix1. The matrices must have equal column dimensions, and Matrix2 is appended to Matrix1 as new rows. Does not alter Matrix1 or Matrix2. colDim() colDim(Matrix ) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the number of columns contained in Matrix . Note: See also rowDim() .
comDenom() comDenom( Expr1,Var) returns a reduced Catalog > ratio of numerator and denominator expanded with respect to Var. The terms and their factors are sorted with Var as the main variable. Similar powers of Var are collected. There might be some incidental factoring of the collected coefficients. Compared to omitting Var, this often saves time, memory, and screen space, while making the expression more comprehensible.
completeSquare () Catalog > - or Converts a quadratic equation of the form a•x2+b•x+c=d into the form a•(x-h) 2=k The first argument must be a quadratic expression or equation in standard form with respect to the second argument. The Second argument must be a single univariate term or a single univariate term raised to a rational power, for example x, y2, or z(1/3). The third and fourth syntax attempt to complete the square with respect to variables Var1, Var2 [,… ]).
CopyVar CopyVar Var1, Var2 Catalog > CopyVar Var1., Var2. CopyVar Var1, Var2 copies the value of variable Var1 to variable Var2, creating Var2 if necessary. Variable Var1 must have a value. If Var1 is the name of an existing userdefined function, copies the definition of that function to function Var2. Function Var1 must be defined. Var1 must meet the variable-naming requirements or must be an indirection expression that simplifies to a variable name meeting the requirements. CopyVar Var1., Var2.
Catalog > ►cos ►cos reduces all powers of sin(...) modulo 1−cos(...)^2 so that any remaining powers of cos(...) have exponents in the range (0, 2). Thus, the result will be free of sin(...) if and only if sin(...) occurs in the given expression only to even powers. Note: This conversion operator is not supported in Degree or Gradian Angle modes. Before using it, make sure that the Angle mode is set to Radians and that Expr does not contain explicit references to degree or gradian angles.
µ key cos() When a scalar function f(A) operates on squareMatrix1 (A), the result is calculated by the algorithm: Compute the eigenvalues ( λ ) and i eigenvectors (Vi) of A. squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. Also, it cannot have symbolic variables that have not been assigned a value. Form the matrices: Then A = X B X⁻¹ and f(A) = X f(B) X⁻¹. For example, cos(A) = X cos(B) X⁻¹ where: cos(B) = All computations are performed using floating-point arithmetic.
cos⁻¹() cos⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse cosine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the inverse cosine of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers. µ key In Radian angle mode and Rectangular Complex Format: To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor.
cosh⁻¹() cosh⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse Catalog > hyperbolic cosines of each element of List1. Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing arccosh(...). cosh⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic cosine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the inverse hyperbolic cosine of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos () . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
µ key cot⁻¹() Note: The result is returned as a degree, gradian or radian angle, according to the current angle mode setting. In Radian angle mode: Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing arccot(...). coth() coth(Expr1) ⇒ expression Catalog > coth(List1) ⇒ list Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Expr1 or returns a list of the hyperbolic cotangents of all elements of List1.
Catalog > count() Within the Lists & Spreadsheet application, you can use a range of cells in place of any argument. Empty (void) elements are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Catalog > countif() countif(List ,Criteria) ⇒ value Returns the accumulated count of all elements in List that meet the specified Criteria. Counts the number of elements equal to 3. Criteria can be: • • A value, expression, or string.
Catalog > cPolyRoots() cPolyRoots(Poly ,Var) ⇒ list cPolyRoots(ListOfCoeffs) ⇒ list The first syntax, cPolyRoots( Poly ,Var) , returns a list of complex roots of polynomial Poly with respect to variable Var. Poly must be a polynomial in one variable. The second syntax, cPolyRoots ( ListOfCoeffs) , returns a list of complex roots for the coefficients in ListOfCoeffs. Note: See also polyRoots() , page 137.
µ key csc() In Radian angle mode: csc ⁻¹() csc⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression µ key In Degree angle mode: csc⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list Returns the angle whose cosecant is Expr1 or returns a list containing the inverse cosecants of each element of List1. In Gradian angle mode: Note: The result is returned as a degree, gradian or radian angle, according to the current angle mode setting. In Radian angle mode: Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing arccsc(...).
cSolve() cSolve(Equation, Var) ⇒ Boolean expression Catalog > cSolve(Equation, Var=Guess) ⇒ Boolean expression cSolve(Inequality , Var) ⇒ Boolean expression Returns candidate complex solutions of an equation or inequality for Var. The goal is to produce candidates for all real and nonreal solutions. Even if Equation is real, cSolve() allows non-real results in Real result Complex Format.
cSolve() Catalog > You should also use var_ for any other variables in Equation that might have unreal values. Otherwise, you may receive unexpected results. cSolve(Eqn1andEqn2 [and…], VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2 [, … ]) ⇒ Boolean expression cSolve(SystemOfEqns, VarOrGuess1, VarOrGuess2 [, …]) ⇒ Boolean expression Returns candidate complex solutions to the simultaneous algebraic equations, where each varOrGuess specifies a variable that you want to solve for.
cSolve() You can also include solution variables that do not appear in the equations. These solutions show how families of solutions might contain arbitrary constants of the form ck , where k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255. For polynomial systems, computation time or memory exhaustion may depend strongly on the order in which you list solution variables. If your initial choice exhausts memory or your patience, try rearranging the variables in the equations and/or varOrGuess list.
Catalog > CubicReg All the lists must have equal dimension except for Include . X and Y are lists of independent and dependent variables. Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each element in Freq specifies the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data point. The default value is 1. All elements must be integers ≥ 0. Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
cumulativeSum() cumulativeSum(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns a matrix of the cumulative sums of the elements in Matrix1. Each element is the cumulative sum of the column from top to bottom. An empty (void) element in List1 or Matrix1 produces a void element in the resulting list or matrix. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Cycle Cycle Transfers control immediately to the next iteration of the current loop ( For, While, or Loop).
cZeros() Returns a list of candidate real and non-real values of Var that make Expr=0. cZeros() does this by computing exp►list(cSolve( Expr=0,Var) ,Var) . Otherwise, cZeros() is similar to zeros() . Note: See also cSolve() , solve() , and zeros() . Catalog > To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor. Note: If Expr is non-polynomial with functions such as abs() , angle() , conj() , real () , or imag() , you should place an underscore (press /_) at the end of Var.
Catalog > cZeros() Complex zeros can include both real and non-real zeros, as in the example to the right. Each row of the resulting matrix represents an alternate zero, with the components ordered the same as the VarOrGuess list. To extract a row, index the matrix by [row]. Extract row 2: Simultaneous polynomials can have extra variables that have no values, but represent given numeric values that could be substituted later. You can also include unknown variables that do not appear in the expressions.
Catalog > cZeros() If a system is neither polynomial in all of its variables nor linear in its unknowns, cZeros () determines at most one zero using an approximate iterative method. To do so, the number of unknowns must equal the number of expressions, and all other variables in the expressions must simplify to numbers. A non-real guess is often necessary to determine a non-real zero. For convergence, a guess might have to be rather close to a zero.
Catalog > ►DD Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>DD. Returns the decimal equivalent of the argument expressed in degrees. The argument is a number, list, or matrix that is interpreted by the Angle mode setting in gradians, radians or degrees.
Define Var and Function cannot be the name of a Catalog > system variable or built-in function or command. Note: This form of Define is equivalent to executing the expression: expression → Function(Param1,Param2). Define Function(Param1, Param2, ...) = Func Block EndFunc Define Program(Param1, Param2, ...) = Prgm Block EndPrgm In this form, the user-defined function or program can execute a block of multiple statements.
Define LibPriv Catalog > ...) = Prgm Block EndPrgm Operates the same as Define, except defines a private library variable, function, or program. Private functions and programs do not appear in the Catalog. Note: See also Define, page 46, and Define LibPub, page 48. Define LibPub Define LibPub Var = Expression Define LibPub Function(Param1, Param2, ...) = Expression Catalog > Define LibPub Function(Param1, Param2, ...) = Func Block EndFunc Define LibPub Program(Param1, Param2, ...
DelVar DelVar Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ... Catalog > DelVar Var. Deletes the specified variable or variable group from memory. If one or more of the variables are locked, this command displays an error message and deletes only the unlocked variables. See unLock, page 197. DelVar Var. deletes all members of the Var. variable group (such as the statistics stat .nn results or variables created using the LibShortcut() function) . The dot ( .
deSolve() • the 1st derivative of the dependent variable with respect to the independent variable. Use two prime symbols to denote the corresponding second derivative. The prime symbol is used for derivatives within deSolve() only. In other cases, use d () . The general solution of a 1st-order equation contains an arbitrary constant of the form ck , where k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255. The solution of a 2nd-order equation contains two such constants.
deSolve() deSolve(2ndOrderODE and initCond1 and initCond2, Var, depVar) ⇒ particular solution Catalog > Returns a particular solution that satisfies 2nd Order ODE and has a specified value of the dependent variable and its first derivative at one point.
det() • Catalog > computations are done using floatingpoint arithmetic. If Tolerance is omitted or not used, the default tolerance is calculated as: 5E ⁻14 •max(dim( squareMatrix )) •rowNorm( squareMatrix ) diag() diag(List ) ⇒ matrix diag(rowMatrix ) ⇒ matrix diag(columnMatrix ) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns a matrix with the values in the argument list or matrix in its main diagonal. diag(squareMatrix ) ⇒ rowMatrix Returns a row matrix containing the elements from the main diagonal of squareMatrix .
Catalog > Disp Disp exprOrString1 [, exprOrString2] ... Displays the arguments in the Calculator history. The arguments are displayed in succession, with thin spaces as separators. Useful mainly in programs and functions to ensure the display of intermediate calculations. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. Catalog > DispAt DispAt int ,expr1 [,expr2 ...] ...
Catalog > DispAt Define z()= Output Prgm z() For n,1,3 Iteration 1: DispAt 1,"N: ",n Line 1: N:1 Disp "Hello" Line 2: Hello EndFor Iteration 2: EndPrgm Line 1: N:2 Line 2: Hello Line 3: Hello Iteration 3: Line 1: N:3 Line 2: Hello Line 3: Hello Line 4: Hello Define z1()= z1() Prgm For n,1,3 DispAt 1,"N: ",n EndFor Line 1: N:3 Line 2: Hello Line 3: Hello Line 4: Hello Line 5: Hello For n,1,4 Disp "Hello" EndFor EndPrgm Error conditions: Error Message Description DispAt line number must be between 1 an
Error Message Description for the void (if the callback is defined) Conversion operator: DispAt 2_ft @> _m, "Hello World" CAS: Datatype Error is thrown (if the callback is defined) Numeric: Conversion will be evaluated and if the result is a valid argument, DispAt print the string at the result line. Catalog > ►DMS Expr ►DMS In Degree angle mode: List ►DMS Matrix ►DMS Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>DMS.
domain() Catalog > Certain functions cannot be used as arguments for domain() , regardless of whether they appear explicitly or within user-defined variables and functions. In the following example, the expression cannot be simplified because ∫() is a disallowed function.
dominantTerm() Catalog > If the series or one of its derivatives has a jump discontinuity at Point , the result is likely to contain sub-expressions of the form sign(…) or abs(…) for a real expansion variable or (-1) floor(…angle(…)…) for a complex expansion variable, which is one ending with “_”. If you intend to use the dominant term only for values on one side of Point , then append to dominantTerm( ...
u key e^() Note: Pressing u to display e^( is different from pressing the character E on the keyboard. You can enter a complex number in reiθ polar form. However, use this form in Radian angle mode only; it causes a Domain error in Degree or Gradian angle mode. e ^(List1) ⇒ list Returns e raised to the power of each element in List1. e ^(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix exponential of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating e raised to the power of each element.
eigVc() Catalog > Returns a matrix containing the eigenvectors for a real or complex squareMatrix , where each column in the result corresponds to an eigenvalue. Note that an eigenvector is not unique; it may be scaled by any constant factor. The eigenvectors are normalized, meaning that: if V = [x1 , x2 , … , xn ] then x1 2 + x2 2 + … + xn 2 = 1 To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor.
ElseIf If BooleanExpr1 Then Block1 ElseIf BooleanExpr2 Then Block2 Catalog > ⋮ ElseIf BooleanExprN Then BlockN EndIf ⋮ Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. EndFor EndFunc EndIf See For, page 73. See Func, page 76. See If, page 87. EndLoop See Loop, page 111. EndPrgm See Prgm, page 138. EndTry EndWhile 60 Alphabetical Listing See Try, page 191.
euler () euler(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, VarMax }, depVar0, VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Differential equation: y'=0.001*y*(100-y) and y(0)=10 euler(SystemOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars, {Var0, VarMax }, ListOfDepVars0, VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix euler(ListOfExpr, Var, ListOfDepVars, {Var0, VarMax }, ListOfDepVars0, VarStep [, eulerStep]) ⇒ matrix Uses the Euler method to solve the system To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor.
Catalog > euler () VarStep is a nonzero number such that sign ( VarStep) = sign( VarMax -Var0) and solutions are returned at Var0+i•VarStep for all i =0,1,2,… such that Var0+i•VarStep is in [var0,VarMax ] (there may not be a solution value at VarMax ). eulerStep is a positive integer (defaults to 1) that defines the number of euler steps between output values. The actual step size used by the euler method is VarStep ⁄ eulerStep.
eval () Hub Menu Although eval() does not display its result, you can view the resulting Hub command string after executing the command by inspecting any of the following special variables. iostr.SendAns iostr.GetAns iostr.GetStrAns Note: See also Get (page 78), GetStr (page 85), and Send (page 159).
►exp Catalog > Expr►exp Represents Expr in terms of the natural exponential e . This is a display conversion operator. It can be used only at the end of the entry line. Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>exp. exp() exp(Expr1) ⇒ expression u key Returns e raised to the Expr1 power. Note: See also e exponent template, page 2. You can enter a complex number in reiθ polar form.
exp►list() Examines Expr for equations that are Catalog > separated by the word “or,” and returns a list containing the right-hand sides of the equations of the form Var=Expr. This gives you an easy way to extract some solution values embedded in the results of the solve() , cSolve() , fMin() , and fMax() functions. Note: exp►list() is not necessary with the zeros() and cZeros() functions because they return a list of solution values directly.
expand() Catalog > Even when there is only one variable, using Var might make the denominator factorization used for partial fraction expansion more complete. Hint: For rational expressions, propFrac() is a faster but less extreme alternative to expand() . Note: See also comDenom() for an expanded numerator over an expanded denominator. expand( Expr1,[Var]) also distributes logarithms and fractional powers regardless of Var.
Catalog > ExpReg All the lists must have equal dimension except for Include . X and Y are lists of independent and dependent variables. Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each element in Freq specifies the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data point. The default value is 1. All elements must be integers ≥ 0. Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
F factor() factor(Expr1[, Var]) ⇒ expression factor(List1[,Var]) ⇒ list factor(Matrix1[,Var]) ⇒ matrix factor( Expr1) returns Expr1 factored with respect to all of its variables over a common denominator. Expr1 is factored as much as possible toward linear rational factors without introducing new non-real subexpressions. This alternative is appropriate if you want factorization with respect to more than one variable. factor( Expr1,Var) returns Expr1 factored with respect to variable Var.
factor() Catalog > Note: See also cFactor() for factoring all the way to complex coefficients in pursuit of linear factors. factor( rationalNumber) returns the rational number factored into primes. For composite numbers, the computing time grows exponentially with the number of digits in the second-largest factor. For example, factoring a 30-digit integer could take more than a day, and factoring a 100digit number could take more than a century.
FCdf() Catalog > Computes the F distribution probability between lowBound and upBound for the specified dfNumer (degrees of freedom) and dfDenom. For P( X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 0. Fill Catalog > Fill Expr, matrixVar ⇒ matrix Replaces each element in variable matrixVar with Expr. matrixVar must already exist. Fill Expr, listVar ⇒ list Replaces each element in variable listVar with Expr. listVar must already exist.
Catalog > FiveNumSummary An empty (void) element in any of the lists X, Freq, or Category results in a void for the corresponding element of all those lists. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Output variable Description stat.MinX Minimum of x values. stat.Q X 1st Quartile of x. stat.MedianX Median of x. stat.Q X 3rd Quartile of x. stat.MaxX Maximum of x values. 1 3 floor() floor(Expr1) ⇒ integer Catalog > Returns the greatest integer that is ≤ the argument.
fMax() Catalog > You can use the constraint (“|”) operator to restrict the solution interval and/or specify other constraints. For the Approximate setting of the Auto or Approximate mode, fMax() iteratively searches for one approximate local maximum. This is often faster, particularly if you use the “|” operator to constrain the search to a relatively small interval that contains exactly one local maximum. Note: See also fMin() and max() .
For Catalog > For Var, Low, High [, Step] Block EndFor Executes the statements in Block iteratively for each value of Var, from Low to High, in increments of Step. Var must not be a system variable. Step can be positive or negative. The default value is 1. Block can be either a single statement or a series of statements separated with the “:” character.
format() Catalog > G[n][c]: Same as fixed format but also separates digits to the left of the radix into groups of three. c specifies the group separator character and defaults to a comma. If c is a period, the radix will be shown as a comma. [Rc]: Any of the above specifiers may be suffixed with the Rc radix flag, where c is a single character that specifies what to substitute for the radix point.
Catalog > freqTable►list() freqIntegerList must have the same dimension as List1 and must contain nonnegative integer elements only. Each element specifies the number of times the corresponding List1 element will be repeated in the result list. A value of zero excludes the corresponding List1 element. Note: You can insert this function from the computer keyboard by typing freqTable@>list(...). Empty (void) elements are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236.
Catalog > FTest_2Samp FTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2 [,Hypoth]]] FTest_2Samp List1,List2[,Freq1[,Freq2 [,Hypoth]]] (Data list input) FTest_2Samp sx1,n1,sx2,n2[,Hypoth] FTest_2Samp sx1,n1,sx2,n2[,Hypoth] (Summary stats input) Performs a two-sample F test. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.
Catalog > Func Block can be a single statement, a series of statements separated with the “:” character, or a series of statements on separate lines. The function can use the Return instruction to return a specific result. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook.
geomCdf() if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are lists Catalog > geomCdf(p,upBound)for P(1≤X≤upBound) ⇒ number if upBound is a number, list if upBound is a list Computes a cumulative geometric probability from lowBound to upBound with the specified probability of success p. For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = 1.
Get Hub Menu Implicit simplification takes place. For example, a received string of "123" is interpreted as a numeric value. To preserve the string, use GetStr instead of Get. If you include the optional argument statusVar, it is assigned a value based on the success of the operation. A value of zero means that no data was received. In the second syntax, the func () argument allows a program to store the received string as a function definition.
Catalog > getKey() • keypressed := getKey() will return a key or an empty string if no key has been pressed. This call will return immediately. keypressed := getKey(1) will wait till a key is pressed. This call will pause execution of the program till a key is pressed.
Handheld Device/Emulator Key Desktop Return Value Templates n/a "template" Catalog n/a "cat" ^ ^ "^" X^2 n/a "square" / (division key) / "/" * (multiply key) * "*" e^x n/a "exp" 10^x n/a "10power" + + "+" - - "-" ( ( "(" ) ) ")" . . ".
Handheld Device/Emulator Key Desktop Return Value Space Space " " (space) Inaccessible Special Character Keys like @,!,^, etc. The character is returned n/a Function Keys No returned character n/a Special desktop control keys No returned character Inaccessible Other desktop keys that are Same character you get in not available on the Notes (not in a math box) calculator while getkey() is waiting for a keystroke. ({, },;, :, ...
exit the program the TIInnovator™ Hub is still working with the handheld. getLangInfo() getLangInfo() ⇒ string Catalog > Returns a string that corresponds to the short name of the currently active language. You can, for example, use it in a program or function to determine the current language.
getMode() getMode(ModeNameInteger) ⇒ value Catalog > getMode(0) ⇒ list getMode( ModeNameInteger) returns a value representing the current setting of the ModeNameInteger mode. getMode(0) returns a list containing number pairs. Each pair consists of a mode integer and a setting integer. For a listing of the modes and their settings, refer to the table below.
Catalog > getNum() getNum(Expr1) ⇒ expression Transforms the argument into an expression having a reduced common denominator, and then returns its numerator. GetStr GetStr [promptString,] var[, statusVar] Hub Menu For examples, see Get . GetStr [promptString,] func (arg1, ...argn) [, statusVar] Programming command: Operates identically to the Get command, except that the retrieved value is always interpreted as a string.
getVarInfo() getVarInfo() ⇒ matrix or string getVarInfo(LibNameString) ⇒ matrix or string getVarInfo() returns a matrix of information (variable name, type, library accessibility, and locked/unlocked state) for all variables and library objects defined in the current problem. If no variables are defined, getVarInfo() returns the string "NONE". getVarInfo( LibNameString) returns a matrix of information for all library objects defined in library LibNameString.
Catalog > Goto Goto labelName Transfers control to the label labelName . labelName must be defined in the same function using a Lbl instruction. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. Catalog > ►Grad Expr1►Grad ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode: Converts Expr1 to gradian angle measure. Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>Grad.
Catalog > If If BooleanExpr evaluates to true, executes the single statement Statement or the block of statements Block before continuing execution. If BooleanExpr evaluates to false, continues execution without executing the statement or block of statements. Block can be either a single statement or a sequence of statements separated with the “:” character.
Catalog > ifFn() ifFn( BooleanExpr,Value_If_true [,Value_ If_false [,Value_If_unknown]]) ⇒ expression, list, or matrix Evaluates the boolean expression BooleanExpr (or each element from BooleanExpr ) and produces a result based on the following rules: • • • • • Test value of 1 is less than 2.5, so its corresponding Value_If_True element of 5 is copied to the result list. BooleanExpr can test a single value, a list, or a matrix.
imag() Catalog > Note: All undefined variables are treated as real variables. See also real(), page 147 imag(List1) ⇒ list Returns a list of the imaginary parts of the elements. imag(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a matrix of the imaginary parts of the elements. impDif() impDif(Equation, Var, dependVar[,Ord]) ⇒ expression Catalog > where the order Ord defaults to 1. Computes the implicit derivative for equations in which one variable is defined implicitly in terms of another.
Catalog > int() int(Expr) ⇒ integer int(List1) ⇒ list int(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the greatest integer that is less than or equal to the argument. This function is identical to floor() . The argument can be a real or a complex number. For a list or matrix, returns the greatest integer of each of the elements. Catalog > intDiv() intDiv(Number1, Number2) ⇒ integer intDiv(List1, List2) ⇒ list intDiv(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the signed integer part of ( Number1 ÷ Number2).
interpolate () Given xList , yList =f( xList ) , and yPrimeList =f'( xList ) for some unknown Catalog > Use the interpolate() function to calculate the function values for the xvaluelist: function f , a cubic interpolant is used to approximate the function f at xValue . It is assumed that xList is a list of monotonically increasing or decreasing numbers, but this function may return a value even when it is not.
invBinom() invBinom (CumulativeProb,NumTrials,Prob, OutputForm)⇒ scalar or matrix Inverse binomial. Given the number of trials ( NumTrials) and the probability of success of each trial ( Prob), this function returns the minimum number of successes, k , such that the value, k , is greater than or equal to the given cumulative probability ( CumulativeProb). Catalog > Example: Mary and Kevin are playing a dice game. Mary has to guess the maximum number of times 6 shows up in 30 rolls.
invt() Catalog > Computes the inverse cumulative student-t probability function specified by degree of freedom, df for a given Area under the curve. iPart() iPart(Number) ⇒ integer iPart(List1) ⇒ list iPart(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns the integer part of the argument. For lists and matrices, returns the integer part of each element. The argument can be a real or a complex number.
isPrime() Returns true or false to indicate if number is a whole number ≥ 2 that is evenly divisible only by itself and 1. Catalog > Function to find the next prime after a specified number: If Number exceeds about 306 digits and has no factors ≤1021, isPrime( Number) displays an error message. If you merely want to determine if Number is prime, use isPrime() instead of factor() . It is much faster, particularly if Number is not prime and has a second-largest factor that exceeds about five digits.
L Lbl Catalog > Lbl labelName Defines a label with the name labelName within a function. You can use a Goto labelName instruction to transfer control to the instruction immediately following the label. labelName must meet the same naming requirements as a variable name. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook.
left() Catalog > Returns the leftmost Num elements contained in List1. If you omit Num, returns all of List1. left(Comparison) ⇒ expression Returns the left-hand side of an equation or inequality. libShortcut() libShortcut(LibNameString, ShortcutNameString [, LibPrivFlag]) ⇒ list of variables Creates a variable group in the current problem that contains references to all the objects in the specified library document libNameString. Also adds the group members to the Variables menu.
limit() or lim() Catalog > Limits at positive ∞ and at negative ∞ are always converted to one-sided limits from the finite side. Depending on the circumstances, limit() returns itself or undef when it cannot determine a unique limit. This does not necessarily mean that a unique limit does not exist. undef means that the result is either an unknown number with finite or infinite magnitude, or it is the entire set of such numbers.
LinRegBx Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each element in Freq specifies the Catalog > frequency of occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data point. The default value is 1. All elements must be integers ≥ 0. Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation.
LinRegMx X and Y are lists of independent and Catalog > dependent variables. Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each element in Freq specifies the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data point. The default value is 1. All elements must be integers ≥ 0. Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes.
Catalog > LinRegtIntervals For Response. Computes a predicted y-value, a level C prediction interval for a single observation, and a level C confidence interval for the mean response. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) All the lists must have equal dimension. X and Y are lists of independent and dependent variables. F is an optional list of frequency values. Each element in F specifies the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data point.
Output variable Description stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error stat.SE Standard error of mean response [stat.LowerPred, stat.UpperPred] Prediction interval for a single observation stat.MEPred Prediction interval margin of error stat.SEPred Standard error for prediction stat. y a + b•XVal LinRegtTest LinRegtTest X,Y[,Freq[,Hypoth]] Computes a linear regression on the X and Y lists and a t test on the value of slope β and the correlation coefficient ρ for the equation y =α +βx.
Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a + b•x stat.t t-Statistic for significance test stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected stat.df Degrees of freedom stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients stat.s Standard error about the line stat.SESlope Standard error of slope stat.r 2 Coefficient of determination stat.r Correlation coefficient stat.
ΔList() Catalog > ΔList(List1) ⇒ list Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing deltaList(...). Returns a list containing the differences between consecutive elements in List1. Each element of List1 is subtracted from the next element of List1. The resulting list is always one element shorter than the original List1. list ►mat() list►mat(List [, elementsPerRow]) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns a matrix filled row-by-row with the elements from List .
ln() /u keys Returns the natural logarithm of the argument. For a list, returns the natural logarithms of the elements. ln(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix natural logarithm of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the natural logarithm of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() on. squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers.
LnReg Include is a list of one or more of the Catalog > category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a+b•ln(x) stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients stat.r 2 Coefficient of linear determination for transformed data stat.
Local Catalog > Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. Lock LockVar1[, Var2] [, Var3] ... LockVar. Catalog > Locks the specified variables or variable group. Locked variables cannot be modified or deleted. You cannot lock or unlock the system variable Ans, and you cannot lock the system variable groups stat . or tvm.
log() log( squareMatrix1[,Expr]) ⇒ squareMatrix /s keys In Radian angle mode and Rectangular complex format: Returns the matrix base-Expr logarithm of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the base-Expr logarithm of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers. If the base argument is omitted, 10 is used as base.
Logistic Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Catalog > Include is a list of one or more of the category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression equation: c/(1+a•e-bx) stat.a, stat.b, stat.c Regression coefficients stat.
LogisticD Freq is an optional list of frequency values. Each element in Freq specifies the Catalog > frequency of occurrence for each corresponding X and Y data point. The default value is 1. All elements must be integers ≥ 0. Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation.
Loop Catalog > Loop Block EndLoop Repeatedly executes the statements in Block . Note that the loop will be executed endlessly, unless a Goto or Exit instruction is executed within Block . Block is a sequence of statements separated with the “:” character. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook.
Catalog > LU The LU factorization algorithm uses partial pivoting with row interchanges. M mat ►list() mat►list(Matrix ) ⇒ list Catalog > Returns a list filled with the elements in Matrix . The elements are copied from Matrix row by row. Note: You can insert this function from the computer keyboard by typing mat@>list (...). max() max(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression max(List1, List2) ⇒ list max(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the maximum of the two arguments.
max() Catalog > Empty (void) elements are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Note: See also fMax() and min(). mean() mean(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the mean of the elements in List . Each freqList element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in List . mean(Matrix1[, freqMatrix ]) ⇒ matrix In Rectangular vector format: Returns a row vector of the means of all the columns in Matrix1.
Catalog > median() Notes: • • All entries in the list or matrix must simplify to numbers. Empty (void) elements in the list or matrix are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. MedMed MedMed X,Y [, Freq] [, Category , Include ]] Computes the median-median line y = (m •x+b) on lists X and Y with frequency Freq. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) All the lists must have equal dimension except for Include .
Output variable Description stat.Resid Residuals from the median-median line stat.XReg List of data points in the modified X List actually used in the regression based on restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories stat.YReg List of data points in the modified Y List actually used in the regression based on restrictions of Freq , Category List, and Include Categories stat.FreqReg List of frequencies corresponding to stat.XReg and stat.
min() min(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression Catalog > min(List1, List2) ⇒ list min(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the minimum of the two arguments. If the arguments are two lists or matrices, returns a list or matrix containing the minimum value of each pair of corresponding elements. min(List ) ⇒ expression Returns the minimum element of List . min(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a row vector containing the minimum element of each column in Matrix1. Note: See also fMin() and max().
mirr() Catalog > Note: See also irr() , page 94. mod() mod(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression Catalog > mod(List1, List2) ⇒ list mod(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the first argument modulo the second argument as defined by the identities: mod(x,0) = x mod(x,y) = x − y floor(x/y) When the second argument is non-zero, the result is periodic in that argument. The result is either zero or has the same sign as the second argument.
MultReg MultReg Y, X1[,X2[,X3,…[,X10]]] Catalog > Calculates multiple linear regression of list Y on lists X1, X2, …, X10. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) All the lists must have equal dimension. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression Equation: b0+b1•x1+b2•x2+ ... stat.b0, stat.b1, ... Regression coefficients stat.
Output variable Description stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval for a mean response stat.ME Confidence interval margin of error stat.SE Standard error of mean response stat.LowerPred, stat.UpperrPred Prediction interval for a single observation stat.MEPred Prediction interval margin of error stat.SEPred Standard error for prediction stat.bList List of regression coefficients, {b0,b1,b2,...} stat.
Output variable Description stat.dfReg Regression degrees of freedom stat.SSReg Regression sum of squares stat.MSReg Regression mean square stat.dfError Error degrees of freedom stat.SSError Error sum of squares stat.MSError Error mean square stat.bList {b0,b1,...} List of coefficients stat.tList List of t statistics, one for each coefficient in the bList stat.PList List P-values for each t statistic stat.SEList List of standard errors for coefficients in bList stat.
nand Integer1 nand Integer2 ⇒ integer /= keys Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using a nand operation. Internally, both integers are converted to signed, 64-bit binary numbers. When corresponding bits are compared, the result is 1 if both bits are 1; otherwise, the result is 0. The returned value represents the bit results, and is displayed according to the Base mode. You can enter the integers in any number base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
nCr() Catalog > Returns a matrix of combinations based on the corresponding element pairs in the two matrices. The arguments must be the same size matrix. nDerivative() nDerivative(Expr1,Var=Value [,Order]) ⇒ value Catalog > nDerivative(Expr1,Var[,Order]) |Var=Value ⇒ value Returns the numerical derivative calculated using auto differentiation methods. When Value is specified, it overrides any prior variable assignment or any current “|” substitution for the variable.
nfMax() Catalog > Returns a candidate numerical value of variable Var where the local maximum of Expr occurs. If you supply lowBound and upBound, the function looks in the closed interval [lowBound,upBound] for the local maximum. Note: See also fMax() and d() .
nInt() Catalog > The goal is six significant digits. The adaptive algorithm terminates when it seems likely that the goal has been achieved, or when it seems unlikely that additional samples will yield a worthwhile improvement. A warning is displayed (“Questionable accuracy”) when it seems that the goal has not been achieved. Nest nInt() to do multiple numeric integration. Integration limits can depend on integration variables outside them. Note: See also ∫() , page 221.
nor Integer1 nor Integer2 ⇒ integer /= keys Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using a nor operation. Internally, both integers are converted to signed, 64-bit binary numbers. When corresponding bits are compared, the result is 1 if both bits are 1; otherwise, the result is 0. The returned value represents the bit results, and is displayed according to the Base mode. You can enter the integers in any number base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively.
Catalog > normCdf() normCdf(lowBound,upBound[,μ[,σ]]) ⇒ number if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are lists Computes the normal distribution probability between lowBound and upBound for the specified μ (default=0) and σ (default=1). For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = ⁻∞.
nPr() nPr(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression Catalog > For integer Expr1 and Expr2 with Expr1 ≥ Expr2 ≥ 0, nPr() is the number of permutations of Expr1 things taken Expr2 at a time. Both arguments can be integers or symbolic expressions. nPr(Expr, 0 ⇒ 1 nPr(Expr, negInteger) ⇒ 1 / ((Expr+1)• (Expr+2) ... (expression−negInteger)) nPr(Expr, posInteger) ⇒ Expr•(Expr−1) ...
npv() CFFreq is a list in which each element Catalog > specifies the frequency of occurrence for a grouped (consecutive) cash flow amount, which is the corresponding element of CFList . The default is 1; if you enter values, they must be positive integers < 10,000.
Catalog > nSolve() Note: See also cSolve() , cZeros() , solve() , and zeros() . O Catalog > OneVar OneVar [1,]X[,[Freq][,Category ,Include ]] OneVar [n,]X1,X2[X3[,…[,X20]]] Calculates 1-variable statistics on up to 20 lists. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) All the lists must have equal dimension except for Include . Freq is an optional list of frequency values.
Output variable Description stat.sx Sample standard deviation of x stat. σx Population standard deviation of x stat.n Number of data points stat.MinX Minimum of x values stat.Q X 1st Quartile of x stat.MedianX Median of x stat.Q X 3rd Quartile of x stat.MaxX Maximum of x values stat.
Catalog > or Compares two real integers bit-by-bit using an or operation. Internally, both integers are converted to signed, 64-bit binary numbers. When corresponding bits are compared, the result is 1 if either bit is 1; the result is 0 only if both bits are 0. The returned value represents the bit results, and is displayed according to the Base mode. Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits (not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal entry can have up to 16 digits.
Catalog > P►Rx() Note: The θ argument is interpreted as either a degree, gradian or radian angle, according to the current angle mode. If the argument is an expression, you can use °, G, or r to override the angle mode setting temporarily. Note: You can insert this function from the computer keyboard by typing P@>Rx(...).
PassErr Catalog > Note: See also ClrErr, page 25, and Try, page 191. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. piecewise() piecewise(Expr1[, Cond1[, Expr2 [, Cond2 Catalog > [, … ]]]]) Returns definitions for a piecewise function in the form of a list. You can also create piecewise definitions by using a template. Note: See also Piecewise template, page 3.
Catalog > ►Polar Vector ►Polar Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>Polar. Displays vector in polar form [r∠ θ]. The vector must be of dimension 2 and can be a row or a column. Note: ►Polar is a display-format instruction, not a conversion function. You can use it only at the end of an entry line, and it does not update ans. Note: See also ►Rect, page 147. complexValue ►Polar In Radian angle mode: Displays complexVector in polar form.
polyCoeffs() Catalog > polyDegree() polyDegree(Poly [,Var]) ⇒ value Catalog > Returns the degree of polynomial expression Poly with respect to variable Var. If you omit Var, the polyDegree() function selects a default from the variables contained in the polynomial Poly . Constant polynomials Poly must be a polynomial expression in Var. We recommend that you do not omit Var unless Poly is an expression in a single variable. The degree can be extracted even though the coefficients cannot.
polyGcd() polyGcd(Expr1,Expr2) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns greatest common divisor of the two arguments. Expr1 and Expr2 must be polynomial expressions. List, matrix, and Boolean arguments are not allowed. polyQuotient() polyQuotient(Poly1,Poly2 [,Var]) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the quotient of polynomial Poly1 divided by polynomial Poly2 with respect to the specified variable Var. Poly1 and Poly2 must be polynomial expressions in Var.
polyRemainder() Catalog > polyRoots() polyRoots(Poly ,Var) ⇒ list Catalog > polyRoots(ListOfCoeffs) ⇒ list The first syntax, polyRoots( Poly ,Var) , returns a list of real roots of polynomial Poly with respect to variable Var. If no real roots exist, returns an empty list: { }. Poly must be a polynomial in one variable. The second syntax, polyRoots ( ListOfCoeffs) , returns a list of real roots for the coefficients in ListOfCoeffs. Note: See also cPolyRoots() , page 36.
Catalog > PowerReg Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•(x)b stat.a, stat.b Regression coefficients stat.
Prgm Catalog > Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. prodSeq() See Π (), page 223. Product (PI) See Π (), page 223. product() product(List [, Start [, End]]) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the product of the elements contained in List . Start and End are optional. They specify a range of elements.
propFrac() propFrac( rational_expression,Var) returns Catalog > the sum of proper ratios and a polynomial with respect to Var. The degree of Var in the denominator exceeds the degree of Var in the numerator in each proper ratio. Similar powers of Var are collected. The terms and their factors are sorted with Var as the main variable. If Var is omitted, a proper fraction expansion is done with respect to the most main variable.
Catalog > QR • computations are done using floatingpoint arithmetic. If Tol is omitted or not used, the default tolerance is calculated as: 5E −14 •max(dim(Matrix )) •rowNorm (Matrix ) The QR factorization is computed numerically using Householder transformations. The symbolic solution is computed using Gram-Schmidt. The columns in qMatName are the orthonormal basis vectors that span the space defined by matrix .
QuadReg Include is a list of one or more of the Catalog > category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•x 2+b•x+c stat.a, stat.b, stat.c Regression coefficients stat.R 2 Coefficient of determination stat.Resid Residuals from the regression stat.
Catalog > QuartReg Category is a list of category codes for the corresponding X and Y data. Include is a list of one or more of the category codes. Only those data items whose category code is included in this list are included in the calculation. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.RegEqn Regression equation: a•x 4+b•x 3+c• x 2+d•x+e stat.a, stat.b, stat.c, stat.d, stat.e Regression coefficients stat.
Catalog > R►Pθ() R►Pr() R►Pr (xExpr, yExpr) ⇒ expression Catalog > In Radian angle mode: R►Pr (xList , yList ) ⇒ list R►Pr (xMatrix , yMatrix ) ⇒ matrix Returns the equivalent r-coordinate of the ( x,y ) pair arguments. Note: You can insert this function from the computer keyboard by typing R@>Pr(...). Catalog > ►Rad Expr1►Rad ⇒ expression In Degree angle mode: Converts the argument to radian angle measure. Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>Rad.
randBin() randBin(n, p) ⇒ expression randBin(n, p, #Trials) ⇒ list Catalog > randBin( n, p) returns a random real number from a specified Binomial distribution. randBin( n, p, #Trials) returns a list containing #Trials random real numbers from a specified Binomial distribution. randInt() Catalog > randInt (lowBound,upBound) ⇒ expression randInt (lowBound,upBound ,#Trials) ⇒ list randInt ( lowBound,upBound) returns a random integer within the range specified by lowBound and upBound integer bounds.
randNorm() randNorm(μ, σ) ⇒ expression randNorm(μ, σ, #Trials) ⇒ list Catalog > randNorm( μ, σ) returns a decimal number from the specified normal distribution. It could be any real number but will be heavily concentrated in the interval [μ−3•σ, μ+3•σ]. randNorm( μ, σ, #Trials) returns a list containing #Trials decimal numbers from the specified normal distribution. randPoly() randPoly(Var, Order) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns a polynomial in Var of the specified Order.
Catalog > real() real(Expr1) ⇒ expression Returns the real part of the argument. Note: All undefined variables are treated as real variables. See also imag() , page 89. real(List1) ⇒ list Returns the real parts of all elements. real(Matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the real parts of all elements. Catalog > ►Rect Vector ►Rect Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @>Rect. Displays Vector in rectangular form [x, y, z].
ref() ref(Matrix1[, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix Returns the row echelon form of Matrix1. Optionally, any matrix element is treated as zero if its absolute value is less than Tol . This tolerance is used only if the matrix has floating-point entries and does not contain any symbolic variables that have not been assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored. • • If you use /· or set the Auto or Approximate mode to Approximate, computations are done using floatingpoint arithmetic.
Catalog > RefreshProbeVars RefreshProbeVars Example Allows you to access sensor data from all connected sensor probes in your TI-Basic program. Define temp()= Prgm © Check if system is ready StatusVar Value Status statusVar Normal (continue with the =0 program) The Vernier DataQuest™ application is in data collection mode. statusVar Note: The Vernier DataQuest™ =1 application must be in meter mode for this command to work.
Catalog > remain() remain(Expr1, Expr2) ⇒ expression remain(List1, List2) ⇒ list remain(Matrix1, Matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the remainder of the first argument with respect to the second argument as defined by the identities: remain(x,0) x remain(x,y) x−y•iPart(x/y) As a consequence, note that remain( −x,y) − remain( x,y) . The result is either zero or it has the same sign as the first argument. Note: See also mod() , page 117.
Catalog > Request The optional statusVar argument gives the program a way to determine how the user dismissed the dialog box. Note that statusVar requires the DispFlag argument. • • If the user clicked OK or pressed Enter or Ctrl+Enter, variable statusVar is set to a value of 1. Otherwise, variable statusVar is set to a value of 0.
Catalog > RequestStr Programming command: Operates identically to the first syntax of the Request command, except that the user’s response is always interpreted as a string. By contrast, the Request command interprets the response as an expression unless the user encloses it in quotation marks (““). Define requestStr_demo()=Prgm RequestStr “Your name:”,name,0 Disp “Response has “,dim(name),” characters.
Catalog > right() Returns the rightmost Num elements contained in List1. If you omit Num, returns all of List1. right(sourceString[, Num]) ⇒ string Returns the rightmost Num characters contained in character string sourceString. If you omit Num, returns all of sourceString. right(Comparison) ⇒ expression Returns the right side of an equation or inequality. rk23 () rk23(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, VarMax }, depVar0, VarStep [, diftol ]) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Differential equation: y'=0.
Catalog > rk23 () ListOfExpr is a list of right-hand sides that define the system of ODEs (corresponds to order of dependent variables in ListOfDepVars). with y1(0)=2 and y2(0)=5 Var is the independent variable. ListOfDepVars is a list of dependent variables. {Var0, VarMax } is a two-element list that tells the function to integrate from Var0 to VarMax . ListOfDepVars0 is a list of initial values for dependent variables.
Catalog > rotate() Rotates the bits in a binary integer. You can enter Integer1 in any number base; it is converted automatically to a signed, 64-bit binary form. If the magnitude of Integer1 is too large for this form, a symmetric modulo operation brings it within the range. For more information, see ►Base2, page 17. If #ofRotations is positive, the rotation is to the left. If #ofRotations is negative, the rotation is to the right. The default is −1 (rotate right one bit).
round() round(Expr1[, digits]) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the argument rounded to the specified number of digits after the decimal point. digits must be an integer in the range 0– 12. If digits is not included, returns the argument rounded to 12 significant digits. Note: Display digits mode may affect how this is displayed. round(List1[, digits]) ⇒ list Returns a list of the elements rounded to the specified number of digits.
Catalog > rowSwap() rowSwap(Matrix1, rIndex1, rIndex2) ⇒ matrix Returns Matrix1 with rows rIndex1 and rIndex2 exchanged. Catalog > rref() rref(Matrix1[, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix Returns the reduced row echelon form of Matrix1. Optionally, any matrix element is treated as zero if its absolute value is less than Tol . This tolerance is used only if the matrix has floating-point entries and does not contain any symbolic variables that have not been assigned a value. Otherwise, Tol is ignored.
µ key sec() Note: The argument is interpreted as a degree, gradian or radian angle, according to the current angle mode setting. You can use °, G, or r to override the angle mode temporarily. sec ⁻¹() sec⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression µ key In Degree angle mode: sec⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list Returns the angle whose secant is Expr1 or returns a list containing the inverse secants of each element of List1.
Send Send exprOrString1 [, exprOrString2] ... Programming command: Sends one or more TI-Innovator™ Hub commands to a connected hub. exprOrString must be a valid TI-Innovator™ Hub Command. Typically, exprOrString contains a "SET ..." command to control a device or a "READ ..." command to request data. Hub Menu Example: Turn on the blue element of the built-in RGB LED for 0.5 seconds. Example: Request the current value of the hub's built-in light-level sensor.
seqGen() seqGen(Expr, Var, depVar, {Var0, VarMax }[, ListOfInitTerms [, VarStep[, CeilingValue ]]]) ⇒ list Generates a list of terms for sequence depVar(Var)=Expr as follows: Increments independent variable Var from Var0 through VarMax by VarStep, evaluates depVar(Var) for corresponding values of Var using the Expr formula and ListOfInitTerms, and returns the results as a list. Catalog > Generate the first 5 terms of the sequence u (n ) = u (n -1)2/2, with u (1)=2 and VarStep =1.
seqn() Catalog > Generates a list of terms for a sequence u ( n)=Expr( u, n) as follows: Increments n from 1 through nMax by 1, evaluates u( n) for corresponding values of n using the Expr(u, n) formula and ListOfInitTerms, and returns the results as a list.
series() Point defaults to 0. Point can be ∞ or −∞, Catalog > in which cases the expansion is through degree Order in 1/( Var − Point ). series(...) returns “series(...) ” if it is unable to determine such a representation, such as for essential singularities such as sin(1/z) at z=0, e−1/z at z=0, or ez at z = ∞ or −∞.
setMode() setMode( modeNameInteger, settingInteger) temporarily sets mode modeNameInteger to the new setting settingInteger, and returns an integer Catalog > corresponding to the original setting of that mode. The change is limited to the duration of the program/function’s execution. modeNameInteger specifies which mode you want to set. It must be one of the mode integers from the table below. settingInteger specifies the new setting for the mode.
Mode Name Mode Integer Setting Integers Angle 2 1=Radian, 2=Degree, 3=Gradian Exponential Format 3 1=Normal, 2=Scientific, 3=Engineering Real or Complex 4 1=Real, 2=Rectangular, 3=Polar Auto or Approx. 5 1=Auto, 2=Approximate, 3=Exact Vector Format 6 1=Rectangular, 2=Cylindrical, 3=Spherical Base 7 1=Decimal, 2=Hex, 3=Binary Unit system 8 1=SI, 2=Eng/US shift() shift(Integer1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ integer Shifts the bits in a binary integer.
Catalog > shift() 0b00000000000000111101011000011010 The result is displayed according to the Base mode. Leading zeros are not shown. shift(List1[,#ofShifts]) ⇒ list In Dec base mode: Returns a copy of List1 shifted right or left by #ofShifts elements. Does not alter List1. If #ofShifts is positive, the shift is to the left. If #ofShifts is negative, the shift is to the right. The default is −1 (shift right one element).
simult() simult(coeffMatrix , constVector[, Tol ]) ⇒ matrix Returns a column vector that contains the solutions to a system of linear equations. Catalog > Solve for x and y: x + 2y = 1 3x + 4y = −1 Note: See also linSolve() , page 103. coeffMatrix must be a square matrix that contains the coefficients of the equations. The solution is x=−3 and y=2. constVector must have the same number of rows (same dimension) as coeffMatrix and contain the constants.
Catalog > ►sin Represents Expr in terms of sine. This is a display conversion operator. It can be used only at the end of the entry line. ►sin reduces all powers of cos(...) modulo 1−sin(...)^2 so that any remaining powers of sin(...) have exponents in the range (0, 2). Thus, the result will be free of cos(...) if and only if cos(...) occurs in the given expression only to even powers. Note: This conversion operator is not supported in Degree or Gradian Angle modes.
µ key sin() Returns the matrix sine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the sine of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers. sin⁻¹() sin⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression µ key In Degree angle mode: sin⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list sin⁻¹( Expr1) returns the angle whose sine is Expr1 as an expression.
sinh() sinh ( List1) returns a list of the hyperbolic sines of each element of List1. sinh(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Catalog > In Radian angle mode: Returns the matrix hyperbolic sine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the hyperbolic sine of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers.
Catalog > SinReg All the lists must have equal dimension except for Include . X and Y are lists of independent and dependent variables. Iterations is a value that specifies the maximum number of times (1 through 16) a solution will be attempted. If omitted, 8 is used. Typically, larger values result in better accuracy but longer execution times, and vice versa. Period specifies an estimated period. If omitted, the difference between values in X should be equal and in sequential order.
Catalog > solve() solve(Equation, Var) ⇒ Boolean expression solve(Equation, Var=Guess) ⇒ Boolean expression solve(Inequality , Var) ⇒ Boolean expression Returns candidate real solutions of an equation or an inequality for Var. The goal is to return candidates for all solutions. However, there might be equations or inequalities for which the number of solutions is infinite. Solution candidates might not be real finite solutions for some combinations of values for undefined variables.
Catalog > solve() false is returned when no real solutions are found. true is returned if solve() can determine that any finite real value of Var satisfies the equation or inequality. Since solve() always returns a Boolean result, you can use “and,” “or,” and “not” to combine results from solve() with each other or with other Boolean expressions. Solutions might contain a unique new undefined constant of the form nj with j being an integer in the interval 1–255.
solve() Catalog > You can separate the equations with the and operator, or you can enter a SystemOfEqns using a template from the Catalog. The number of VarOrGuess arguments must match the number of equations. Optionally, you can specify an initial guess for a variable. Each VarOrGuess must have the form: variable – or – variable = real or non-real number For example, x is valid and so is x=3.
solve() Catalog > For polynomial systems, computation time or memory exhaustion may depend strongly on the order in which you list solution variables. If your initial choice exhausts memory or your patience, try rearranging the variables in the equations and/or varOrGuess list. If you do not include any guesses and if any equation is non-polynomial in any variable but all equations are linear in the solution variables, solve() uses Gaussian elimination to attempt to determine all real solutions.
Catalog > SortA Empty (void) elements within the first argument move to the bottom. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Catalog > SortD SortD List1[, List2][, List3]... SortD Vector1[,Vector2][,Vector3]... Identical to SortA, except SortD sorts the elements in descending order. Empty (void) elements within the first argument move to the bottom. For more information on empty elements, see page 236.
►Sphere Catalog > sqrt() sqrt(Expr1) ⇒ expression Catalog > sqrt(List1) ⇒ list Returns the square root of the argument. For a list, returns the square roots of all the elements in List1. Note: See also Square root template, page 1.
Catalog > stat.results stat.results Displays results from a statistics calculation. The results are displayed as a set of namevalue pairs. The specific names shown are dependent on the most recently evaluated statistics function or command. You can copy a name or value and paste it into other locations. Note: Avoid defining variables that use the same names as those used for statistical analysis. In some cases, an error condition could occur.
stat.CUpperList stat.d stat.ME stat.MedianX stat.Q1Y stat.SS Note: Each time the Lists & Spreadsheet application calculates statistical results, it copies the “stat.” group variables to a “stat#.” group, where # is a number that is incremented automatically. This lets you maintain previous results while performing multiple calculations. stat.values stat.values Catalog > See the stat.results example.
stDevPop() Note:Matrix1must have at least two rows. Catalog > Empty (void) elements are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. stDevSamp() stDevSamp(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the sample standard deviation of the elements in List . Each freqList element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in List . Note:List must have at least two elements. Empty (void) elements are ignored.
Stop Catalog > Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. Store string() string(Expr) ⇒ string See →(store), page 233. Catalog > Simplifies Expr and returns the result as a character string. subMat() subMat(Matrix1[, startRow][, startCol ][, endRow][, endCol ]) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns the specified submatrix of Matrix1.
sum() sum(Matrix1[, Start [, End]]) ⇒ matrix Catalog > Returns a row vector containing the sums of all elements in the columns in Matrix1. Start and End are optional. They specify a range of rows. Any void argument produces a void result. Empty (void) elements in Matrix1 are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. sumIf() sumIf(List ,Criteria[, SumList ]) ⇒ value Catalog > Returns the accumulated sum of all elements in List that meet the specified Criteria.
Catalog > sumIf() Empty (void) elements are ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Note: See also countIf() , page 35. sumSeq() See Σ(), page 224. Catalog > system() system(Eqn1[, Eqn2[, Eqn3[, ...]]]) system(Expr1[, Expr2[, Expr3[, ...]]]) Returns a system of equations, formatted as a list. You can also create a system by using a template. Note: See also System of equations , page 3.
µ key tan() Note: The argument is interpreted as a degree, gradian or radian angle, according to the current angle mode. You can use °, g or r to override the angle mode setting temporarily. In Gradian angle mode: In Radian angle mode: tan(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode: Returns the matrix tangent of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the tangent of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable.
µ key tan⁻¹() Returns the matrix inverse tangent of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the inverse tangent of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() . squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers. Catalog > tangentLine() tangentLine(Expr1,Var,Point ) ⇒ expression tangentLine(Expr1,Var=Point ) ⇒ expression Returns the tangent line to the curve represented by Expr1 at the point specified in Var=Point .
tanh⁻¹() tanh⁻¹(Expr1) ⇒ expression Catalog > In Rectangular complex format: tanh⁻¹(List1) ⇒ list tanh⁻¹( Expr1) returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of the argument as an expression. tanh⁻¹( List1) returns a list of the inverse hyperbolic tangents of each element of List1. Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing arctanh(...). tanh⁻¹(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic tangent of squareMatrix1.
tCdf() tCdf(lowBound,upBound,df ) ⇒ number if lowBound and upBound are numbers, list if lowBound and upBound are lists Catalog > Computes the Student-t distribution probability between lowBound and upBound for the specified degrees of freedom df . For P(X ≤ upBound), set lowBound = ⁻∞.
Catalog > tExpand() Note: Degree-mode scaling by π/180 interferes with the ability of tExpand() to recognize expandable forms. For best results, tExpand() should be used in Radian mode. Text TextpromptString[, DispFlag] Programming command: Pauses the program and displays the character string promptString in a dialog box. When the user selects OK, program execution continues. Catalog > Define a program that pauses to display each of five random numbers in a dialog box. Within the Prgm...
Catalog > tInterval tInterval v, sx , n[, CLevel ] (Summary stats input) Computes a t confidence interval. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval for an unknown population mean stat. v Sample mean of the data sequence from the normal random distribution stat.ME Margin of error stat.
Output variable Description stat.CLower, stat.CUpper Confidence interval containing confidence level probability of distribution stat. v1-v2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random distribution stat.ME Margin of error stat.df Degrees of freedom stat. v1, stat. v2 Sample means of the data sequences from the normal random distribution stat. σx1, stat. σx2 Sample standard deviations for List 1 and List 2 stat.n1, stat.n2 Number of samples in data sequences stat.
ΔtmpCnv() Catalog > ΔtmpCnv(Expr_°tempUnit , _°tempUnit2) ⇒ expression _°tempUnit2 Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing deltaTmpCnv(...). Converts a temperature range (the difference between two temperature values) specified by Expr from one unit to another. Valid temperature units are: Note: You can use the Catalog to select temperature units. _°C Celsius _°F Fahrenheit _°K Kelvin _°R Rankine To enter °, select it from the Symbol Palette or type @d. To type _ , press /_.
Catalog > Try Try block1 Else block2 EndTry Executes block1 unless an error occurs. Program execution transfers to block2 if an error occurs in block1. System variable errCode contains the error code to allow the program to perform error recovery. For a list of error codes, see “Error codes and messages,” page 251. block1 and block2 can be either a single statement or a series of statements separated with the “:” character.
tTest tTest μ0,List [,Freq[,Hypoth]] Catalog > (Data list input) tTest μ0,v,sx ,n,[Hypoth] (Summary stats input) Performs a hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean μ when the population standard deviation σ is unknown. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.
Catalog > tTest_2Samp Computes a two-sample t test. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) Test H : μ1 = μ2, against one of the 0 following: For H : μ1< μ2, set Hypoth<0 a For H : μ1≠ μ2 (default), set Hypoth=0 a For H : μ1> μ2, set Hypoth>0 a Pooled=1 pools variances Pooled=0 does not pool variances For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.
tvmI() Catalog > Financial function that calculates the interest rate per year. Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions are described in the table of TVM arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() , page 8. tvmN() tvmN(I,PV,Pmt ,FV,[PpY],[CpY],[PmtAt ]) ⇒ value Catalog > Financial function that calculates the number of payment periods. Note: Arguments used in the TVM functions are described in the table of TVM arguments, page 195. See also amortTbl() , page 8.
TVM argument* Description Data type N Number of payment periods real number I Annual interest rate real number PV Present value real number Pmt Payment amount real number FV Future value real number PpY Payments per year, default=1 integer > 0 CpY Compounding periods per year, default=1 integer > 0 PmtAt Payment due at the end or beginning of each period, default=end integer (0=end, 1=beginning) * These time-value-of-money argument names are similar to the TVM variable names (such
Catalog > TwoVar An empty (void) element in any of the lists X, Freq, or Category results in a void for the corresponding element of all those lists. An empty element in any of the lists X1 through X20 results in a void for the corresponding element of all those lists. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Output variable Description stat. v Mean of x values stat. Σ x Sum of x values stat. Σ x2 Sum of x2 values stat.sx Sample standard deviation of x stat.
Output variable Description stat.MaxY Maximum of y values stat. Σ (x-v)2 Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of x stat. Σ (y-w)2 Sum of squares of deviations from the mean of y U unitV() unitV(Vector1) ⇒ vector Catalog > Returns either a row- or column-unit vector, depending on the form of Vector1. Vector1 must be either a single-row matrix or a single-column matrix. To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor. unLock unLock Var1[, Var2] [, Var3] ...
V varPop() varPop(List [, freqList ]) ⇒ expression Catalog > Returns the population variance of List . Each freqList element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in List . Note: List must contain at least two elements. If an element in either list is empty (void), that element is ignored, and the corresponding element in the other list is also ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236.
Catalog > varSamp() If an element in either matrix is empty (void), that element is ignored, and the corresponding element in the other matrix is also ignored. For more information on empty elements, see page 236. Note: Matrix1 must contain at least two rows. W Catalog > Wait Wait timeInSeconds To wait 4 seconds: Suspends execution for a period of timeInSeconds seconds.
warnCodes () warnCodes(Expr1, StatusVar) ⇒ expression Evaluates expression Expr1, returns the result, and stores the codes of any generated warnings in the StatusVar list variable. If no warnings are generated, this function assigns StatusVar an empty list. Expr1 can be any valid TI-Nspire™ or TI-Nspire™ CAS math expression. You cannot use a command or assignment as Expr1. Catalog > To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor. StatusVar must be a valid variable name.
Catalog > While While Condition Block EndWhile Executes the statements in Block as long as Condition is true. Block can be either a single statement or a sequence of statements separated with the “:” character. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook.
Catalog > xor You can enter the integers in any number base. For a binary or hexadecimal entry, you must use the 0b or 0h prefix, respectively. Without a prefix, integers are treated as decimal (base 10). Note: A binary entry can have up to 64 digits (not counting the 0b prefix). A hexadecimal entry can have up to 16 digits. If you enter a decimal integer that is too large for a signed, 64-bit binary form, a symmetric modulo operation is used to bring the value into the appropriate range.
Catalog > zeros() variable – or – variable = real or non-real number For example, x is valid and so is x=3. If all of the expressions are polynomials and if you do NOT specify any initial guesses, zeros() uses the lexical Gröbner/Buchberger elimination method to attempt to determine all real zeros. For example, suppose you have a circle of radius r at the origin and another circle of radius r centered where the first circle crosses the positive x-axis. Use zeros() to find the intersections.
Catalog > zeros() If you do not include any guesses and if any expression is non-polynomial in any variable but all expressions are linear in the unknowns, zeros() uses Gaussian elimination to attempt to determine all real zeros. If a system is neither polynomial in all of its variables nor linear in its unknowns, zeros() determines at most one zero using an approximate iterative method.
Output variable Description stat.n Length of the data sequence with sample mean stat. σ Known population standard deviation for data sequence List zInterval_1Prop zInterval_1Prop x ,n [,CLevel ] Catalog > Computes a one-proportion z confidence interval. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) x is a non-negative integer. For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.
Output variable Description stat. Ç 1 First sample proportion estimate stat. Ç 2 Second sample proportion estimate stat.n1 Sample size in data sequence one stat.n2 Sample size in data sequence two zInterval_2Samp zInterval_2Samp σ1 ,σ2 ,List1,List2[,Freq1 [,Freq2,[CLevel ]]] Catalog > (Data list input) zInterval_2Samp σ1 ,σ2 ,v 1,n1,v 2,n2 [,CLevel ] (Summary stats input) Computes a two-sample z confidence interval. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.
Catalog > zTest (Data list input) zTest μ0,σ,v,n[,Hypoth] (Summary stats input) Performs a z test with frequency freqlist . A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) Test H : μ = μ0, against one of the 0 following: For H : μ < μ0, set Hypoth<0 a For H : μ ≠ μ0 (default), set Hypoth=0 a For H : μ > μ0, set Hypoth>0 a For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.
Catalog > zTest_2Prop Computes a two-proportion z test. A summary of results is stored in the stat.results variable. (See page 177.) x1 and x2 are non-negative integers. Test H : p1 = p2, against one of the 0 following: For H : p1 > p2, set Hypoth>0 a For H : p1 ≠ p2 (default), set Hypoth=0 a For H : p < p0, set Hypoth<0 a For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.
Catalog > zTest_2Samp For information on the effect of empty elements in a list, see “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. Output variable Description stat.z Standard normal value computed for the difference of means stat.PVal Smallest level of significance at which the null hypothesis can be rejected stat. x1, stat. x2 Sample means of the data sequences in List1 and List2 stat.sx1, stat.sx2 Sample standard deviations of the data sequences in List1 and List2 stat.n1, stat.
Symbols + (add) Expr1 + Expr2 ⇒ expression + key Returns the sum of the two arguments. List1 + List2 ⇒ list Matrix1 + Matrix2 ⇒ matrix Returns a list (or matrix) containing the sums of corresponding elements in List1 and List2 (or Matrix1 and Matrix2). Dimensions of the arguments must be equal. Expr + List1 ⇒ list List1 + Expr ⇒ list Returns a list containing the sums of Expr and each element in List1.
− (subtract) - key Subtracts each element in List2 (or Matrix2) from the corresponding element in List1 (or Matrix1), and returns the results. Dimensions of the arguments must be equal. Expr − List1 ⇒ list List1 − Expr ⇒ list Subtracts each List1 element from Expr or subtracts Expr from each List1 element, and returns a list of the results. Expr − Matrix1 ⇒ matrix Matrix1 − Expr ⇒ matrix Expr − Matrix1 returns a matrix of Expr times the identity matrix minus Matrix1. Matrix1 must be square.
• (multiply) r key Expr •List1 ⇒ list List1•Expr ⇒ list Returns a list containing the products of Expr and each element in List1. Expr •Matrix1 ⇒ matrix Matrix1•Expr ⇒ matrix Returns a matrix containing the products of Expr and each element in Matrix1. Note: Use .•(dot multiply) to multiply an expression by each element. ⁄ (divide) Expr1 ⁄ Expr2 ⇒ expression Returns the quotient of Expr1 divided by Expr2. Note: See also Fraction template, page 1.
⁄ (divide) p key Note: Use . ⁄ (dot divide) to divide an expression by each element. ^ (power) Expr1 ^ Expr2⇒ expression l key List1 ^ List2 ⇒ list Returns the first argument raised to the power of the second argument. Note: See also Exponent template, page 1. For a list, returns the elements in List1 raised to the power of the corresponding elements in List2.
x2 (square) Expr12⇒ expression q key Returns the square of the argument. List12 ⇒ list Returns a list containing the squares of the elements in List1. squareMatrix12 ⇒ matrix Returns the matrix square of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the square of each element. Use .^2 to calculate the square of each element. .+ (dot add) Matrix1 .+ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix ^+ keys Expr .+ Matrix1⇒ matrix Matrix1.
. •(dot mult.) Matrix1 .• Matrix2⇒ matrix ^r keys Expr .• Matrix1 ⇒ matrix Matrix1.• Matrix2 returns a matrix that is the product of each pair of corresponding elements in Matrix1 and Matrix2. Expr .• Matrix1 returns a matrix containing the products of Expr and each element in Matrix1. . ⁄ (dot divide) Matrix1. ⁄ Matrix2 ⇒ matrix ^p keys Expr . ⁄ Matrix1⇒ matrix Matrix1 . ⁄ Matrix2 returns a matrix that is the quotient of each pair of corresponding elements in Matrix1 and Matrix2. Expr .
v key − (negate) Returns the negation of the argument. For a list or matrix, returns all the elements negated. In Bin base mode: Important: Zero, not the letter O. If the argument is a binary or hexadecimal integer, the negation gives the two’s complement. To see the entire result, press £ and then use ¡ and ¢ to move the cursor. % (percent) Expr1% ⇒ expression List1% ⇒ list Matrix1% ⇒ matrix /k keys Note: To force an approximate result, Handheld: Press / ·. Windows®: Press Ctrl+Enter .
= key = (equal) Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook. /= keys ≠ (not equal) Expr1≠Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example. List1≠List2 ⇒ Boolean list Matrix1≠Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be not equal to Expr2. Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be equal to Expr2. Anything else returns a simplified form of the equation.
/= keys < (less than) Anything else returns a simplified form of the equation. For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element by element. /= keys ≤ (less or equal) Expr1≤Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example. List1≤List2 ⇒ Boolean list Matrix1 ≤Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be less than or equal to Expr2. Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be greater than Expr2. Anything else returns a simplified form of the equation.
/= keys ≥ (greater or equal) Expr1≥Expr2 ⇒ Boolean expression See “=” (equal) example. List1≥List2 ⇒ Boolean list Matrix1 ≥Matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix Returns true if Expr1 is determined to be greater than or equal to Expr2. Returns false if Expr1 is determined to be less than Expr2. Anything else returns a simplified form of the equation. For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element by element.
⇔ (logical double implication, XNOR) /= keys BooleanExpr1 ⇔ BooleanExpr2 returns Boolean expression BooleanList1 ⇔ BooleanList2 returns Boolean list BooleanMatrix1 ⇔ BooleanMatrix2 returns Boolean matrix Integer1 ⇔ Integer2 returns Integer Returns the negation of an XOR Boolean operation on the two arguments. Returns true, false, or a simplified form of the equation. For lists and matrices, returns comparisons element by element.
d() (derivative) Catalog > d(Expr1, Var[, Order]) ⇒ expression d(List1, Var[, Order]) ⇒ list d(Matrix1,Var[, Order]) ⇒ matrix Returns the first derivative of the first argument with respect to variable Var. Order, if included, must be an integer. If the order is less than zero, the result will be an anti-derivative. Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing derivative(...).
∫() (integral) Catalog > Returns the integral of Expr1 with respect to the variable Var from Lower to Upper. Note: See also Definite or Indefinite integral template, page 6. Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing integral(...). If Lower and Upper are omitted, returns an anti-derivative. A symbolic constant of integration is omitted unless you provide the Constant argument. Equally valid anti-derivatives might differ by a numeric constant.
∫() (integral) Catalog > ∫() can be nested to do multiple integrals. Integration limits can depend on integration variables outside them. Note: See also nInt() , page 123. √() (square root) /q keys √(Expr1) ⇒ expression √(List1) ⇒ list Returns the square root of the argument. For a list, returns the square roots of all the elements in List1. Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing sqrt(...) Note: See also Square root template, page 1.
Π() (prodSeq) Catalog > Π(Expr1, Var, Low, Low−1) ⇒ 1 Π(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ 1/Π(Expr1, Var, High+1, Low−1) if High < Low−1 The product formulas used are derived from the following reference: Ronald L. Graham, Donald E. Knuth, and Oren Patashnik. Concrete Mathematics: A Foundation for Computer Science . Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1994. Σ() (sumSeq) Σ(Expr1, Var, Low, High) ⇒ expression Note: You can insert this function from the keyboard by typing sumSeq(...).
ΣInt() Catalog > ΣInt(NPmt1, NPmt2, N, I, PV ,[Pmt ], [FV], [PpY], [CpY], [PmtAt ], [roundValue ]) ⇒ value ΣInt(NPmt1,NPmt2,amortTable ) ⇒ value Amortization function that calculates the sum of the interest during a specified range of payments. NPmt1 and NPmt2 define the start and end boundaries of the payment range. N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt are described in the table of TVM arguments, page 195. • • • If you omit Pmt , it defaults to Pmt =tvmPmt ( N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt ).
ΣPrn() Catalog > NPmt1 and NPmt2 define the start and end boundaries of the payment range. N, I, PV, Pmt , FV, PpY, CpY, and PmtAt are described in the table of TVM arguments, page 195. • • • If you omit Pmt , it defaults to Pmt =tvmPmt ( N,I,PV,FV,PpY,CpY,PmtAt ). If you omit FV, it defaults to FV=0. The defaults for PpY, CpY, and PmtAt are the same as for the TVM functions. roundValue specifies the number of decimal places for rounding. Default=2.
E (scientific notation) i key mantissaEexponent Enters a number in scientific notation. The number is interpreted as mantissa × 10exponent. Hint: If you want to enter a power of 10 without causing a decimal value result, use 10^integer. Note: You can insert this operator from the computer keyboard by typing @E. for example, type 2.3@E4 to enter 2.3E 4.
¹ key r(radian) This function gives you a way to specify a radian angle while in Degree or Gradian mode. In Degree angle mode, multiplies the argument by 180/ π. In Radian angle mode, returns the argument unchanged. In Gradian mode, multiplies the argument by 200/ π. Hint: Use r if you want to force radians in a function definition regardless of the mode that prevails when the function is used. Note: You can insert this symbol from the computer keyboard by typing @r.
/k keys °, ', '' (degree/minute/second) dd A positive or negative number mm A non-negative number ss.ss A non-negative number Returns dd+( mm/60)+( ss.ss/3600). This base-60 entry format lets you: • • Enter an angle in degrees/minutes/seconds without regard to the current angle mode. Enter time as hours/minutes/seconds. Note: Follow ss.ss with two apostrophes (''), not a quote symbol (").
/k keys ∠ (angle) º key ' (prime) variable ' variable ' ' Enters a prime symbol in a differential equation. A single prime symbol denotes a 1st-order differential equation, two prime symbols denote a 2nd-order, and so on. _ (underscore as an empty element) See “Empty (Void) Elements,” page 236. /_ keys _ (underscore as unit designator) Expr_Unit Designates the units for an Expr. All unit names must begin with an underscore. You can use pre-defined units or create your own units.
► (convert) /k keys Expr_Unit1►_Unit2 ⇒ Expr_Unit2 Converts an expression from one unit to another. The _ underscore character designates the units. The units must be in the same category, such as Length or Area. For a list of pre-defined units, open the Catalog and display the Unit Conversions tab: • • You can select a unit name from the list. You can select the conversion operator, ►, from the top of the list. You can also type unit names manually.
^ ⁻¹ (reciprocal) Expr1 ^⁻¹ ⇒ expression Catalog > List1 ^⁻¹ ⇒ list Returns the reciprocal of the argument. For a list, returns the reciprocals of the elements in List1. squareMatrix1 ^⁻¹ ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the inverse of squareMatrix1. squareMatrix1 must be a non-singular square matrix. | (constraint operator) Expr | BooleanExpr1[and BooleanExpr2]... Expr | BooleanExpr1[ orBooleanExpr2]... The constraint (“|”) symbol serves as a binary operator. The operand to the left of | is an expression.
| (constraint operator) /k keys Interval constraints take the form of one or more inequalities joined by logical “and” or “or” operators. Interval constraints also permit simplification that otherwise might be invalid or not computable. Exclusions use the “not equals” (/= or ≠) relational operator to exclude a specific value from consideration. They are used primarily to exclude an exact solution when using cSolve() , cZeros() , fMax() , fMin() , solve() , zeros() , and so on.
→ (store) /h key Hint: If you plan to do symbolic computations using undefined variables, avoid storing anything into commonly used, one-letter variables such as a, b, c, x, y, z, and so on. Note: You can insert this operator from the keyboard by typing =: as a shortcut. For example, type pi/4 =: myvar. := (assign) Var := Expr Var := List Var := Matrix Function(Param1,...) := Expr Function(Param1,...) := List Function(Param1,...
/k keys © (comment) © [text ] © processes text as a comment line, allowing you to annotate functions and programs that you create. © can be at the beginning or anywhere in the line. Everything to the right of © , to the end of the line, is the comment. Note for entering the example: For instructions on entering multi-line program and function definitions, refer to the Calculator section of your product guidebook.
Empty (Void) Elements When analyzing real-world data, you might not always have a complete data set. TI-Nspire™ CAS Software allows empty, or void, data elements so you can proceed with the nearly complete data rather than having to start over or discard the incomplete cases. You can find an example of data involving empty elements in the Lists & Spreadsheet chapter, under “Graphing spreadsheet data.” The delVoid() function lets you remove empty elements from a list.
List arguments containing void elements In regressions, a void in an X or Y list introduces a void for the corresponding element of the residual. An omitted category in regressions introduces a void for the corresponding element of the residual. A frequency of 0 in regressions introduces a void for the corresponding element of the residual.
Shortcuts for Entering Math Expressions Shortcuts let you enter elements of math expressions by typing instead of using the Catalog or Symbol Palette. For example, to enter the expression √6, you can type sqrt (6) on the entry line. When you press ·, the expression sqrt(6) is changed to √6. Some shortcuts are useful from both the handheld and the computer keyboard. Others are useful primarily from the computer keyboard.
To enter this: Type this shortcut: n1, n2, ... (integer constants) @n1, @n2, ... i (imaginary constant) @i e (natural log base e) @e (scientific notation) @E T (transpose) @t r (radians) @r ° (degrees) @d g @g E (gradians) ∠ (angle) @< ► (conversion) @> ►Decimal, ►approxFraction() , and so on. @>Decimal, @>approxFraction(), and so on.
EOS™ (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy This section describes the Equation Operating System (EOS™) that is used by the TI-Nspire™ CAS math and science learning technology. Numbers, variables, and functions are entered in a simple, straightforward sequence. EOS™ software evaluates expressions and equations using parenthetical grouping and according to the priorities described below.
The number of opening and closing parentheses, brackets, and braces must be the same within an expression or equation. If not, an error message is displayed that indicates the missing element. For example, (1+2)/(3+4 will display the error message “Missing ).” Note: Because the TI-Nspire™ CAS software allows you to define your own functions, a variable name followed by an expression in parentheses is considered a “function call” instead of implied multiplication.
Constants and Values The following table lists the constants and their values that are available when performing unit conversions. They can be typed in manually or selected from the Constants list in Utilities > Unit Conversions (Handheld: Press k 3). Constant Name Value _c Speed of light 299792458 _m/_s _Cc Coulomb constant 8987551787.3682 _m/_F _Fc Faraday constant 96485.33289 _coul/_mol _g Acceleration of gravity 9.80665 _m/_s2 _Gc Gravitational constant 6.
Error Codes and Messages When an error occurs, its code is assigned to variable errCode . User-defined programs and functions can examine errCode to determine the cause of an error. For an example of using errCode , See Example 2 under the Try command, page 191. Note: Some error conditions apply only to TI-Nspire™ CAS products, and some apply only to TI-Nspire™ products. Error code Description 10 A function did not return a value 20 A test did not resolve to TRUE or FALSE.
Error code Description 180 Break The d or c key was pressed during a long calculation or during program execution. 190 Circular definition This message is displayed to avoid running out of memory during infinite replacement of variable values during simplification. For example, a+1->a, where a is an undefined variable, will cause this error.
Error code Description 345 Inconsistent units 350 Index out of range 360 Indirection string is not a valid variable name 380 Undefined Ans Either the previous calculation did not create Ans, or no previous calculation was entered. 390 Invalid assignment 400 Invalid assignment value 410 Invalid command 430 Invalid for the current mode settings 435 Invalid guess 440 Invalid implied multiply For example, x(x+1) is invalid; whereas, x*(x+1) is the correct syntax.
Error code Description 600 Invalid table 605 Invalid use of units 610 Invalid variable name in a Local statement 620 Invalid variable or function name 630 Invalid variable reference 640 Invalid vector syntax 650 Link transmission A transmission between two units was not completed. Verify that the connecting cable is connected firmly to both ends. 665 Matrix not diagonalizable 670 Low Memory 1. Delete some data in this document 2.
Error code Description To allow complex results, change the “Real or Complex” Mode Setting to RECTANGULAR or POLAR. 830 Overflow 850 Program not found A program reference inside another program could not be found in the provided path during execution. 855 Rand type functions not allowed in graphing 860 Recursion too deep 870 Reserved name or system variable 900 Argument error Median-median model could not be applied to data set.
Error code Description 1000 Window variables domain 1010 Zoom 1020 Internal error 1030 Protected memory violation 1040 Unsupported function. This function requires Computer Algebra System. Try TI-Nspire™ CAS. 1045 Unsupported operator. This operator requires Computer Algebra System. Try TI-Nspire™ CAS. 1050 Unsupported feature. This operator requires Computer Algebra System. Try TI-Nspire™ CAS. 1060 Input argument must be numeric. Only inputs containing numeric values are allowed.
Error code Description A pathname must be in the form xxx\yyy, where: • • The xxx part can have 1 to 16 characters. The yyy part can have 1 to 15 characters. See the Library section in the documentation for more details. 1170 Invalid use of library pathname • • 1180 A value cannot be assigned to a pathname using Define, :=, or sto → . A pathname cannot be declared as a Local variable or be used as a parameter in a function or program definition. Invalid library variable name.
Error code Description Trigonometric conversion operators are not supported in Degree or Gradian angle modes. 1250 Argument Error Use a system of linear equations. Example of a system of two linear equations with variables x and y: 3x+7y=5 2y-5x=-1 1260 Argument Error: The first argument of nfMin or nfMax must be an expression in a single variable. It cannot contain a non-valued variable other than the variable of interest. 1270 Argument Error Order of the derivative must be equal to 1 or 2.
Warning Codes and Messages You can use the warnCodes() function to store the codes of warnings generated by evaluating an expression. This table lists each numeric warning code and its associated message. For an example of storing warning codes, see warnCodes() , page 200. Warning code Message 10000 Operation might introduce false solutions. 10001 Differentiating an equation may produce a false equation. 10002 Questionable solution 10003 Questionable accuracy 10004 Operation might lose solutions.
Warning code Message 10022 Specifying appropriate lower and upper bounds might produce a solution. 10023 Scalar has been multiplied by the identity matrix. 10024 Result obtained using approximate arithmetic. 10025 Equivalence cannot be verified in EXACT mode. 10026 Constraint might be ignored.
Support and Service Texas Instruments Support and Service General Information: North and South America Home Page: KnowledgeBase and e-mail inquiries: education.ti.com education.ti.com/support Phone: (800) TI-CARES / (800) 842-2737 For North and South America and U.S. Territories International contact information: https://education.ti.com/en/us/customersupport/support_worldwide For Technical Support Knowledge Base and support by e-mail: education.ti.com/support or ticares@ti.
Index ^, power 213 _ -, subtract _, unit designation ! !, factorial | |, constraint operator 220 " ", second notation 228 #, indirection #, indirection operator ′ minute notation ′, prime 226 241 216 & &, append 220 +, add ≠, not equal ≤, less than or equal ≥, greater than or equal >, greater than =, equal ∏, product 214 215 215 215 214 ∑( ), sum ∑Int( ) ∑Prn( ) 224 225 225 √ √, square root / 223 ∠ 212 ∠ (angle) : :=, assign 223 ∑ . /, divide 217 218 219 218 216 ∏ 211 .
► ►, convert units ►approxFraction( ) ►Base10, display as decimal integer ►Base16, display as hexadecimal ►Base2, display as binary ►cos, display in terms of cosine ►Cylind, display as cylindrical vector ►DD, display as decimal angle ►Decimal, display result as decimal ►DMS, display as degree/minute/second ►exp, display in terms of e ►Grad, convert to gradian angle ►Polar, display as polar vector ►Rad, convert to radian angle ►Rect, display as rectangular vector ►sin, display in terms of sine ►Sphere, displ
average rate of change, avgRC( ) avgRC( ), average rate of change 16 16 B binary display, ►Base2 indicator, 0b binomCdf( ) binomPdf( ) Boolean operators ⇒ ⇔ and nand nor not or xor 17 235 20, 93 20 219, 238 220 9 120 124 126 130 201 C Cdf( ) 69 ceiling( ), ceiling 20 ceiling, ceiling( ) 20-21, 36 centralDiff( ) 21 cFactor( ), complex factor 21 char( ), character string 22 character string, char( ) 22 characters numeric code, ord( ) 131 string, char( ) 22 charPoly( ) 23 χ²2way 23 clear error, ClrErr 25 C
countif( ) count items in a list, count( ) count( ), count items in a list countif( ), conditionally count items in a list cPolyRoots() cross product, crossP( ) crossP( ), cross product csc⁻¹( ), inverse cosecant csc( ), cosecant csch⁻¹( ), inverse hyperbolic cosecant csch( ), hyperbolic cosecant cSolve( ), complex solve cubic regression, CubicReg CubicReg, cubic regression cumulative sum, cumulativeSum( ) cumulativeSum( ), cumulative sum cycle, Cycle Cycle, cycle cylindrical vector display, ►Cylind cZeros(
poissPdf( ) tCdf( ) tPdf( ) χ²2way( ) χ²Cdf( ) χ²GOF( ) χ²Pdf( ) divide, / domain function, domain( ) domain( ), domain function dominant term, dominantTerm( ) dominantTerm( ), dominant term dot addition, .+ division, ./ multiplication, .* power, .^ product, dotP( ) subtraction, .
Fill, matrix fill financial functions, tvmFV( ) financial functions, tvmI( ) financial functions, tvmN( ) financial functions, tvmPmt( ) financial functions, tvmPV( ) first derivative template for FiveNumSummary floor( ), floor floor, floor( ) fMax( ), function maximum fMin( ), function minimum For for, For For, for format string, format( ) format( ), format string fpart( ), function part fractions propFrac template for freqTable( ) frequency( ) Frobenius norm, norm( ) Func, function Func, program function
imaginary part, imag( ) ImpDif( ), implicit derivative implicit derivative, Impdif( ) indefinite integral template for indirection operator (#) indirection, # input, Input Input, input inString( ), within string int( ), integer intDiv( ), integer divide integer divide, intDiv( ) integer part, iPart( ) integer, int( ) integral, ∫ interpolate( ), interpolate inverse cumulative normal distribution (invNorm( ) inverse, ^⁻¹ invF( ) invNorm( ), inverse cumulative normal distribution) invt( ) Invχ²( ) iPart( ), i
local variable, Local 106 local, Local 106 Local, local variable 106 Lock, lock variable or variable group 107 locking variables and variable groups 107 Log template for 2 logarithmic regression, LnReg 105 logarithms 104 logical double implication, ⇔ 220 logical implication, ⇒ 219, 238 logistic regression, Logistic 108 logistic regression, LogisticD 109 Logistic, logistic regression 108 LogisticD, logistic regression 109 loop, Loop 111 Loop, loop 111 LU, matrix lower-upper 111 decomposition M mat►list( ),
mixed fractions, using propFrac(› with mod( ), modulo mode settings, getMode( ) modes setting, setMode( ) modified internal rate of return, mirr ( ) modulo, mod( ) mRow( ), matrix row operation mRowAdd( ), matrix row multiplication and addition Multiple linear regression t test multiply, * MultReg MultRegIntervals( ) MultRegTests( ) 139 117 84 162 116 117 117 117 119 211 118 118 119 N nand, Boolean operator natural logarithm, ln( ) nCr( ), combinations nDerivative( ), numeric derivative negation, entering
vector display, ►Polar 134 polyCoef( ) 134 polyDegree( ) 135 polyEval( ), evaluate polynomial 135 polyGcd( ) 136 polynomials evaluate, polyEval( ) 135 random, randPoly( ) 146 PolyRoots() 137 power of ten, 10^( ) 231 power regression, 137, 150-151, 187 PowerReg power, ^ 213 PowerReg, power regression 137 Prgm, define program 138 prime number test, isPrime( ) 94 prime, ′ 230 probability densiy, normPdf( ) 126 prodSeq() 139 product( ), product 139 product, ∏( ) 223 template for 5 product, product( ) 139 progra
quartic, QuartReg 142 sinusoidal, SinReg 169 remain( ), remainder 150 remainder, remain( ) 150 remove void elements from list 49 Request 150 RequestStr 151 result display in terms of cosine 29 display in terms of e 64 display in terms of sine 166 result values, statistics 178 results, statistics 177 return, Return 152 Return, return 152 right( ), right 152 right, right( ) 27, 61, 91, 152-153 rk23( ), Runge Kutta function 153 rotate( ), rotate 154 rotate, rotate( ) 154 round( ), round 156 round, round( ) 156
random number seed, 146 RandSeed standard deviation, stdDev 178-179, 198 ( ) two-variable results, TwoVar 195 variance, variance( ) 198 stdDevPop( ), population standard 178 deviation stdDevSamp( ), sample standard 179 deviation Stop command 179 store variable (→) 233 storing symbol, & 234 string dimension, dim( ) 52 length 52 string( ), expression to string 180 strings append, & 220 character code, ord( ) 131 character string, char( ) 22 expression to string, string( ) 180 format, format( ) 73 formatting 7
second derivative 6 square root 1 sum, ∑( ) 5 system of equations (23 equation) system of equations (N3 equation) test for void, isVoid( ) 95 Test_2S, 2-sample F test 76 tExpand( ), trigonometric expansion 186 Text command 187 time value of money, Future Value 193 time value of money, Interest 193 time value of money, number of 194 payments time value of money, payment 194 amount time value of money, present value 194 tInterval, t confidence interval 187 tInterval_2Samp, twosample t 188 confidence interval
within string, inString( ) 90 X x², square XNOR xor, Boolean exclusive or 214 220 201 Z zeroes( ), zeroes zeroes, zeroes( ) zInterval, z confidence interval zInterval_1Prop, one-proportion z confidence interval zInterval_2Prop, two-proportion z confidence interval zInterval_2Samp, two-sample z confidence interval zTest zTest_1Prop, one-proportion z test zTest_2Prop, two-proportion z test zTest_2Samp, two-sample z test 202 202 204 205 205 206 206 207 207 208 Χ χ²Cdf( ) χ²GOF χ²Pdf( ) 267 Index 24 24
